Kenwood Marine Radio TS 590S User Manual
INSTRUCTION MANUAL  
HF/ 50 MHz ALL MODE TRANSCEIVER  
TS-590S  
NOTIFICATION  
This equipment complies with the essential requirements of Directive 1999/5/EC.  
The use of the warning symbol means the equipment is subject to restrictions of use  
in certain countries.  
This equipment requires a licence and is intended for use in the countries below.  
AT  
IE  
BE  
IT  
DK  
LI  
FI  
FR  
NL  
CZ  
SI  
DE  
NO  
EE  
BG  
GR  
PT  
IS  
ES  
LV  
LU  
CY  
SK  
SE  
LT  
CH  
MT  
GB  
PL  
HU  
RO  
ISO3166  
© B62-2243-00 (K, E)  
09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 00  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7+$1.ꢀ<28  
127,&(ꢀ72ꢀ7+(ꢀ86(5  
Thank you for choosing this Kenwood TS-590S  
transceiver. It has been developed by a team of  
engineers determined to continue the tradition of  
excellence and innovation in Kenwood transceivers.  
One or more of the following statements may be  
applicable for this equipment.  
FCC WARNING  
This equipment generates or uses radio frequency energy.  
Changes or modifications to this equipment may cause harmful  
interference unless the modifications are expressly approved  
in the instruction manual. The user could lose the authority to  
operate this equipment if an unauthorized change or modification  
is made.  
This transceiver features a Digital Signal Processing  
(DSP) unit to process IF and AF signals. By taking  
maximum advantage of DSP technology, the TS-590S  
transceiver gives you enhanced interference reduction  
capabilities and improves the quality of audio. You will  
notice the differences when you fight QRM and QRN.  
As you learn how to use this transceiver, you will also  
find that Kenwood is pursuing “user friendliness”.  
For example, each time you change the Menu No. in  
Menu mode, you will see scrolling messages on the  
display, telling you what you are selecting.  
INFORMATION TO THE DIGITAL DEVICE USER REQUIRED  
BY THE FCC  
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the  
limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the  
FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable  
protection against harmful interference in a residential  
installation.  
This equipment generates, uses and can generate radio  
frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance  
with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio  
communications. However, there is no guarantee that the  
interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this  
equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television  
reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off  
and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference  
by one or more of the following measures:  
Though user friendly, this transceiver is technically  
sophisticated and some features may be new to you.  
Consider this manual to be a personal tutorial from the  
designers. Allow the manual to guide you through the  
learning process now, then act as a reference in the  
coming years.  
•
•
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.  
Increase the separation between the equipment and  
receiver.  
Connect the equipment to an outlet on a circuit different from  
that to which the receiver is connected.  
Consult the dealer for technical assistance.  
)($785(6  
•
•
•
All mode operation from HF to 50 MHz amateur  
radio band  
•
•
500 Hz/ 2.7 kHz roofing filter  
Superior C/N response by the DDS largely  
decreases the noise of the undesired signal.  
%()25(ꢀ67$57,1*  
Amateur radio regulations vary from country to  
country. Confirm your local amateur radio regulations  
and requirements before operating the transceiver.  
•
IF DSP through the adoption of 32-bit floating point  
DSP  
•
•
Digital Noise Blanker  
PC interface via a Universal Serial Bus port  
(B-type)  
Depending on the size and type of vehicle, the  
maximum transmission output power for the mobile  
operation will vary. The maximum transmission output  
power is usually specified by the car manufacturer  
to avoid interference with other electric devices used  
in the vehicle. Consult your car manufacturer and  
amateur radio equipment dealer for the requirements  
and installation.  
•
•
•
•
Drive output and RX only antenna connector  
Direct band keys  
Built-in Antenna Tuner for the HF/ 50 MHz band  
100 W output power for SSB, CW, FSK, FM, and  
25 W output power for AM.  
0$5.(7ꢀ&2'(6  
K-type: The Americas  
E-type: Europe  
The market code is shown on the carton box.  
Refer to the specifications {page 81} for information  
on the available operating frequencies.  
Information on Disposal of Old Electrical and Electronic Equipment  
and Batteries (applicable for EU countries that have adopted  
separate waste collection systems)  
Products and batteries with the symbol (crossed-out wheeled  
bin) cannot be disposed as household waste.  
Old electrical and electronic equipment and batteries should  
be recycled at a facility capable of handling these items and  
their waste byproducts.  
Contact your local authority for details in locating a recycle  
facility nearest to you.  
Proper recycling and waste disposal will help conserve  
resources whilst preventing detrimental effects on our health  
and the environment.  
i
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
:5,7,1*ꢀ&219(17,216ꢀ)2//2:('  
6833/,('ꢀ$&&(6625,(6  
The writing conventions described below have  
been followed to simplify instructions and avoid  
unnecessary repetition.  
After carefully unpacking the transceiver, identify the  
items listed in the table below. We recommend you  
keep the box and packing materials in case you need  
to repack the transceiver in the future.  
Instruction  
Press [KEY].  
Action  
Quantity  
Press and release KEY.  
Accessory  
Microphone  
Comment  
K-type E-type  
Press and release KEY on  
the microphone.  
Press Mic [KEY].  
1
1
1
1
Press and hold KEY down  
DC power cable  
Press and hold [KEY]. for a moment, then release  
Line filter (with  
retaining band)  
–
1
1
1
KEY.  
Press and hold KEY down  
until instructed to release  
KEY.  
25 A; for DC  
power cable  
Fuse  
Hold [KEY].  
4 A; for an  
external  
antenna tuner  
With the transceiver power  
OFF, press and hold KEY,  
then switch the transceiver  
power ON by pressing [ ].  
Fuse  
1
1
Press [KEY] + [ ].  
7-pin  
1
1
1
4
1
1
–
–
–
–
1
1
1
4
1
1
1
1
1
1
DIN plug  
13-pin  
DIN plug  
Screw set  
Plastic spacer  
For bracket  
For bracket  
English  
French  
Spanish  
German  
Italian  
Instruction Manual  
Dutch  
Schematic  
diagram  
2
1
–
1
Warranty Card  
ii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
•
•
Locate the transceiver away from heat sources  
such as a radiator, stove, amplifier or other devices  
that produce substantial amounts of heat.  
35(&$87,216  
Please observe the following precautions to prevent  
fire, personal injury, and transceiver damage:  
Do not use volatile solvents such as alcohol, paint  
thinner, gasoline, or benzene to clean the cabinet  
of the transceiver. Use only a clean cloth with  
warm water or a mild detergent.  
•
•
Connect the transceiver only to a power source  
as described in this manual or as marked on the  
transceiver itself.  
Route all power cables safely. Ensure the power  
cables can neither be stepped upon nor pinched  
by items placed near or against the cables.  
Pay particular attention to locations near AC  
receptacles, AC outlet strips, and points of entry to  
the transceiver.  
•
•
Disconnect the input power cable from the power  
source when the transceiver is not used for long  
periods of time.  
Remove the transceiver’s enclosure only to do  
accessory installations described in this manual or  
accessory manuals. Follow provided instructions  
carefully, to avoid electrical shocks. If unfamiliar  
with this type of work, seek assistance from an  
experienced individual, or have a professional  
technician do the task.  
•
Take care not to drop objects or spill liquid into the  
transceiver through enclosure openings. Metal  
objects, such as hairpins or needles, inserted into  
the transceiver may contact voltages resulting in  
serious electrical shocks. Never permit children to  
insert any objects into the transceiver.  
•
Enlist the services of qualified personnel in the  
following cases:  
•
•
Do not attempt to defeat methods used for  
grounding and electrical polarization in the  
transceiver, particularly involving the power input  
cable.  
a) The power supply or plug is damaged.  
b) Objects have fallen into or liquid has spilled into  
the transceiver.  
c) The transceiver has been exposed to rain.  
Adequately ground all outdoor antennas for this  
transceiver using approved methods. Grounding  
helps protect against voltage surges caused by  
lightning. It also reduces the chance of a build-up  
of static charge.  
d) The transceiver is operating abnormally or  
performance has seriously degraded.  
e) The transceiver has been dropped or the  
enclosure damaged.  
EXAMPLE OF ANTENNA GROUNDING  
•
Do not attempt to perform any kind of configuration  
or menu setup while driving.  
ANTENNA  
LEAD IN  
•
•
Do not wear headphones while driving.  
WIRE  
GROUND  
CLAMP  
Install the transceiver in a safe and convenient  
position inside your vehicle so as not to subject  
yourself to danger while driving. Consult your car  
dealer for the transceiver installation to ensure  
safety.  
ANTENNA  
DISCHARGE UNIT  
GROUNDING  
CONDUCTORS  
•
HF/ 50 MHz mobile antennas are larger and  
heavier than VHF/ UHF antennas. Therefore, use  
a strong and rigid mount to safely and securely  
install the HF/ 50 MHz mobile antenna.  
GROUND CLAMPS  
ELECTRIC SERVICE  
EQUIPMENT  
POWER SERVICE  
GROUNDING ELECTRODE  
SYSTEM  
•
•
Minimum recommended distance for an outdoor  
antenna from power lines is one and one-half  
times the vertical height of the associated antenna  
support structure. This distance allows adequate  
clearance from the power lines if the support  
structure fails for any reason.  
Locate the transceiver so as not to interfere with its  
ventilation. Do not place books or other equipment  
on the transceiver that may impede the free  
movement of air. Allow a minimum of 10 cm  
(4 inches) between the rear of the transceiver and  
the wall or operating desk shelf.  
•
•
Do not use the transceiver near water or sources  
of moisture. For example, avoid use near a  
bathtub, sink, swimming pool, or in a damp  
basement or attic.  
The presence of an unusual odor or smoke is often  
a sign of trouble. Immediately turn the power OFF  
and remove the power cable. Contact a Kenwood  
service station or your dealer for advice.  
iii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
&217(176  
THANK YOU ............................................................ i  
FEATURES .............................................................. i  
NOTICE TO THE USER........................................... i  
BEFORE STARTING ............................................... i  
MARKET CODES..................................................... i  
WRITING CONVENTIONS FOLLOWED .................ii  
SUPPLIED ACCESSORIES.....................................ii  
PRECAUTIONS ......................................................iii  
CONTENTS.............................................................iv  
TX SIDETONE/ RX PITCH FREQUENCY........ 23  
CARRIER LEVEL.................................................. 23  
POWER ON MESSAGE........................................ 23  
CHAPTER 6 ENHANCED COMMUNICATIONS  
SPLIT-FREQUENCY OPERATION....................... 24  
TF-SET (TRANSMISSION FREQUENCY SET)24  
FM REPEATER OPERATION............................... 25  
TRANSMITTING A TONE................................. 25  
Activating the Tone Function........................ 26  
Selecting a Tone Frequency ........................ 26  
TONE FREQUENCY ID SCAN ......................... 26  
FM CTCSS OPERATION...................................... 26  
CTCSS FREQUENCY ID SCAN....................... 27  
CROSS TONE....................................................... 27  
CHAPTER 1 INSTALLATION  
ANTENNA CONNECTION...................................... 1  
GROUND CONNECTION ....................................... 1  
LIGHTNING PROTECTION .................................... 1  
DC POWER SUPPLY CONNECTION .................... 1  
UTILIZING THE BAIL.............................................. 2  
REPLACING FUSES .............................................. 2  
ACCESSORY CONNECTIONS .............................. 2  
FRONT PANEL ................................................... 2  
Headphones (PHONES) ................................ 2  
Microphone (MIC)........................................... 2  
REAR PANEL...................................................... 2  
External Speaker (EXT.SP)............................ 2  
Keys for CW (PADDLE and KEY).................. 2  
CHAPTER 7 COMMUNICATING AIDS  
RECEPTION ......................................................... 28  
SELECTING YOUR FREQUENCY................... 28  
Direct Frequency Entry................................. 28  
Frequency Entry History............................... 28  
Using the MHz key....................................... 28  
Quick QSY.................................................... 28  
Fine Tuning .................................................. 29  
Tuning Control Adjustment Rate.................. 29  
Equalizing VFO Frequencies (A=B) ............. 29  
RIT (RECEIVE INCREMENTAL TUNING)............ 29  
AGC (AUTOMATIC GAIN CONTROL).............. 29  
AGC Time Constant Adjustment.................. 29  
TRANSMISSION................................................... 30  
VOX (VOICE-OPERATED TRANSMISSION)... 30  
Microphone Input Level................................ 30  
Delay Time................................................... 30  
Anti-VOX Adjustment ................................... 30  
Data VOX..................................................... 30  
Data VOX Delay Time.................................. 31  
USB/ ACC2 VOX Gain................................. 31  
SPEECH PROCESSOR.................................... 31  
peech Processor Effect................................ 31  
XIT (TRANSMIT INCREMENTAL TUNING) ..... 31  
CUSTOMIZING TRANSMISSION SIGNAL  
CHAPTER 2 GETTING ACQUAINTED  
FRONT PANEL ....................................................... 4  
LCD DISPLAY......................................................... 7  
REAR PANEL.......................................................... 9  
MICROPHONE........................................................ 9  
CHAPTER 3 OPERATING BASICS  
SWITCHING POWER ON/ OFF............................ 10  
ADJUSTING THE VOLUME.................................. 10  
AF (AUDIO FREQUENCY) GAIN...................... 10  
RF (RADIO FREQUENCY) GAIN ..................... 10  
SELECTING VFO A OR VFO B............................ 10  
SELECTING A BAND............................................ 11  
SELECTING A MODE........................................... 11  
ADJUSTING THE SQUELCH................................ 12  
TUNING A FREQUENCY...................................... 12  
MULTI-FUNCTION METER .................................. 12  
TRANSMITTING ................................................... 13  
SELECTING TRANSMISSION POWER........... 13  
MICROPHONE GAIN........................................ 13  
CHARACTERISTICS ........................................ 32  
TX Filter Bandwidth (SSB/ AM).................... 32  
TX Filter Bandwidth (LSB-DATA/ USB-DATA). 32  
TX Equalizer (SSB/ AM/ FM)........................ 32  
TRANSMIT INHIBIT .......................................... 32  
BUSY LOCKOUT .............................................. 32  
CHANGING FREQUENCY WHILE  
CHAPTER 4 MENU SETUP  
WHAT IS A MENU? .............................................. 14  
MENU A/ MENU B ................................................ 14  
MENU ACCESS.................................................... 14  
QUICK MENU ....................................................... 14  
PROGRAMMING THE QUICK MENU .............. 14  
USING THE QUICK MENU............................... 14  
MENU CONFIGURATION..................................... 15  
CHARACTER ENTRY........................................... 20  
TRANSMITTING ............................................... 32  
CW BREAK-IN ...................................................... 33  
USING SEMI BREAK-IN OR FULL BREAK-IN..... 33  
ELECTRONIC KEYER.......................................... 33  
ELECTRONIC KEYER MODE .......................... 33  
CHANGING KEYING SPEED ........................... 33  
Invalid Break-In Operation............................ 33  
RISE TIME OF CW ........................................... 34  
AUTO WEIGHTING........................................... 34  
Reverse Keying Weight Ratio ...................... 34  
BUG KEY FUNCTION....................................... 34  
CW MESSAGE MEMORY ................................ 34  
Storing CW Messages.................................. 34  
Checking CW Messages without  
CHAPTER 5 BASIC COMMUNICATIONS  
SSB TRANSMISSION........................................... 21  
FM TRANSMISSION............................................. 21  
AM TRANSMISSION............................................. 22  
NARROW BANDWIDTH FOR FM......................... 22  
CW TRANSMISSION............................................ 22  
AUTO ZERO-BEAT........................................... 23  
Transmitting.................................................. 35  
iv  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
&217(176  
Transmitting CW Messages......................... 35  
Changing the Inter-message Interval Time... 35  
Changing the CW Sidetone Volume............. 35  
Insert Keying ................................................ 35  
FREQUENCY CORRECTION FOR CW........... 35  
AUTO CW TX IN SSB MODE ........................... 36  
MIC UP/ DWN KEY PADDLE MODE................ 36  
SWAP DOT AND DASH PADDLE POSITIONS 36  
PROGRAM SCAN PARTIALLY SLOWED........ 47  
SCAN HOLD ..................................................... 48  
MEMORY SCAN ................................................... 48  
SCAN RESUME................................................ 48  
ALL-CHANNEL SCAN....................................... 48  
GROUP SCAN .................................................. 49  
Memory Group ............................................. 49  
Scan Group Select....................................... 49  
Performing Group Scan................................ 49  
QUICK MEMORY SCAN....................................... 49  
CHAPTER 8 DATA COMMUNICATIONS  
RADIO TELETYPE (RTTY)................................... 37  
PHASE-SHIFT KEYING 31 BAUD (PSK31).......... 37  
CHAPTER 12 OPERATOR CONVENIENCES  
ANTENNAS........................................................... 50  
ANT 1/ ANT 2.................................................... 50  
RX ANT ............................................................. 50  
DRV................................................................... 50  
APO (Auto Power OFF)......................................... 50  
AUTOMATIC ANTENNA TUNER.......................... 50  
PRESETTING ................................................... 51  
AUTO MODE......................................................... 51  
BEEP FUNCTION ................................................. 52  
DISPLAY ............................................................... 53  
BRIGHTNESS................................................... 53  
BACKLIGHT COLOR ........................................ 53  
PANEL KEY DOUBLE FUNCTION RESPONSE  
TIME...................................................................... 53  
LINEAR AMPLIFIER CONTROL........................... 53  
LOCK FUNCTIONS............................................... 53  
FREQUENCY LOCK FUNCTION ..................... 53  
PROGRAMMABLE FUNCTION KEYS.................. 54  
TRANSCEIVER FRONT PANEL....................... 54  
MICROPHONE KEYS....................................... 54  
DSP RX EQUALIZER............................................ 55  
Equalizing Receiving Audio.......................... 55  
RX MONITOR ................................................... 55  
TIME-OUT TIMER................................................. 55  
TRANSVERTER.................................................... 55  
FREQUENCY DISPLAY.................................... 55  
TRANSMISSION OUTPUT POWER................. 56  
TX MONITOR........................................................ 56  
TX POWER ........................................................... 56  
TX TUNE............................................................... 56  
QUICK DATA TRANSFER.................................... 56  
SETTING UP..................................................... 56  
Equipment Needed....................................... 56  
Connections ................................................. 56  
USING QUICK TRANSFER .............................. 57  
Transferring Data ......................................... 57  
Receiving Data............................................. 57  
COMPUTER CONTROL ....................................... 57  
SETTING UP..................................................... 57  
Equipment Needed....................................... 57  
Connections ................................................. 57  
COMMUNICATION PARAMETERS ................. 57  
EXTERNAL AUDIO SETTINGS........................ 58  
Selecting a Data Transmission Line............. 58  
Audio Level Settings..................................... 58  
TERMINAL ........................................................ 58  
CONTROLLING THE TS-590S FROM A PC.... 58  
REMOTELY CONTROLLING THE TS-590S ON  
THE NETWORK................................................ 58  
OPTIONAL VGS-1 VOICE GUIDE & STORAGE  
UNIT...................................................................... 58  
CHAPTER 9 REJECTING INTERFERENCE  
DSP FILTERS ....................................................... 38  
CHANGING THE DSP FILTER BANDWIDTH .. 38  
SSB/ FM/ AM Mode...................................... 38  
CW/ FSK Mode ............................................ 38  
Data Mode.................................................... 38  
IF Filter A and B ........................................... 38  
AUTO NOTCH FILTER (SSB)............................... 39  
AUTO NOTCH TRACKING SPEED.................. 39  
MANUAL NOTCH FILTER (SSB/ CW/ FSK)......... 39  
Notch Filter Bandwidth................................. 39  
BEAT CANCEL (SSB/ AM) ............................... 39  
NOISE REDUCTION (ALL MODES)................. 39  
Setting the NR1 Level Adjustment ............... 40  
Setting the NR2 Time Constant.................... 40  
NOISE BLANKER ................................................. 40  
PRE-AMPLIFIER................................................... 40  
ATTENUATOR...................................................... 40  
CW REVERSE (RECEPTION).............................. 40  
CHAPTER 10 MEMORY FEATURES  
MEMORY CHANNELS.......................................... 41  
STORING DATA IN MEMORY.......................... 41  
Simplex Channels ........................................ 41  
Split-Frequency Channels............................ 41  
MEMORY RECALL AND SCROLL ................... 42  
Memory Recall ............................................. 42  
Memory Scroll .............................................. 42  
Temporary Frequency Changes................... 42  
MEMORY TRANSFER...................................... 42  
Memory °ꢀVFO Transfer.............................. 42  
Channel ° Channel Transfer ....................... 42  
STORING FREQUENCY RANGES .................. 43  
Confirming Start/ End Frequencies.............. 44  
Programmable VFO ..................................... 44  
MEMORY CHANNEL LOCKOUT...................... 44  
ERASING MEMORY CHANNELS .................... 44  
MEMORY CHANNEL NAME............................. 44  
QUICK MEMORY.................................................. 44  
NUMBER OF QUICK MEMORY CHANNELS... 45  
STORING INTO QUICK MEMORY................... 45  
RECALLING QUICK MEMORY CHANNELS.... 45  
TEMPORARY FREQUENCY CHANGES ......... 45  
QUICK MEMORY ° VFO TRANSFER............. 45  
ERASING QUICK MEMORY CHANNELS........ 45  
CHAPTER 11 SCAN  
NORMAL SCAN.................................................... 46  
VFO SCAN........................................................ 46  
PROGRAM SCAN............................................. 46  
v
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
&217(176  
RECORDING MESSAGES ............................... 59  
CHAPTER 16 OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES  
MESSAGE PLAYBACK..................................... 59  
Checking Messages..................................... 59  
Sending Messages....................................... 59  
Erasing a Recorded Message...................... 59  
Changing Inter-message Interval Time........ 59  
Changing Message Playback Volume.......... 60  
CONSTANT RECORDING................................ 60  
VOICE GUIDE................................................... 60  
Voice Guide Announcement Volume .......... 62  
Voice Guide Announcement Speed ............ 62  
Voice Guide Announcement Language ....... 62  
EMERGENCY CALL (K TYPE ONLY) .................. 62  
CROSSBAND REPEATER .................................. 63  
OPERATION ..................................................... 63  
DX PACKETCLUSTER TUNE............................... 63  
SKY COMMAND II ................................................ 64  
SKY COMMAND II DIAGRAM .......................... 64  
PREPARATION................................................. 64  
Starting Sky Command II operation: ............ 64  
OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES ................................. 80  
CHAPTER 17 SPECIFICATIONS  
SPECIFICATIONS ................................................ 81  
CHAPTER 13 CONNECTING PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT  
TERMINAL DESCRIPTIONS ................................ 65  
COM CONNECTOR.......................................... 65  
ACC2 CONNECTOR......................................... 65  
REMOTE CONNECTOR................................... 66  
EXT.AT CONNECTOR (FOR AT-300).............. 66  
MIC CONNECTOR............................................ 66  
COMPUTER.......................................................... 67  
COMPATIBLE TRANSCEIVER............................. 67  
RTTY OPERATION............................................... 68  
HF/ 50 MHz LINEAR AMPLIFIER ......................... 68  
ANTENNA TUNER................................................ 69  
TNC AND MCP ..................................................... 69  
DX PACKETCLUSTER TUNE............................... 70  
CROSSBAND REPEATER ................................... 70  
CHAPTER 14 INSTALLING OPTIONS  
REMOVING THE BOTTOM CASE........................ 71  
VGS-1 VOICE GUIDE & STORAGE UNIT............ 71  
SO-3 TCXO........................................................... 72  
REFERENCE FREQUENCY CALIBRATION ....... 72  
MB-430 MOBILE BRACKET ................................. 73  
PRECAUTIONS ................................................ 73  
CHAPTER 15 TROUBLESHOOTING  
GENERAL INFORMATION................................... 74  
SERVICE........................................................... 74  
SERVICE NOTE................................................ 74  
CLEANING........................................................ 74  
TROUBLESHOOTING .......................................... 75  
MICROPROCESSOR RESET............................... 78  
INITIAL SETTINGS ........................................... 78  
VFO RESET...................................................... 78  
FULL RESET..................................................... 78  
OPERATION NOTICES ........................................ 79  
DC POWER SUPPLY ....................................... 79  
INTERNAL COOLING FAN............................... 79  
INTERNAL BEATS............................................ 79  
AGC................................................................... 79  
60m BAND OPERATION (K-TYPE/ USA ONLY) ..79  
vi  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
,167$//$7,21  
$17(11$ꢀ&211(&7,21  
/,*+71,1*ꢀ3527(&7,21  
An antenna system consists of an antenna, feed  
line, and ground. The transceiver can give excellent  
results if the antenna system and its installation are  
JLYHQꢀFDUHIXOꢀDWWHQWLRQꢁꢀꢀ8VHꢀDꢀSURSHUO\ꢀDGMXVWHGꢀꢂꢃꢀŸꢀ  
DQWHQQDꢀRIꢀJRRGꢀTXDOLW\ꢄꢀDꢀKLJKꢅTXDOLW\ꢀꢂꢃꢀŸꢀFRD[LDOꢀ  
cable, and top-quality connectors. All connections  
must be clean and tight.  
Even in areas where lightning storms are less  
common, there is always a chance that a storm will  
occur each year. Consider carefully how to protect  
your equipment and home from lightning. The  
installation of a lightning arrestor is a start, but there  
is more that you can do. For example, terminate  
your antenna system transmission lines at an entry  
panel that you install outside your home. Ground this  
entry panel to a good outside ground, then connect  
the appropriate feed lines between the entry panel  
and your transceiver. When a lightning storm occurs,  
disconnecting the feed lines from your transceiver will  
ensure additional protection.  
After making the connections, match the impedance  
of the coaxial cable and antenna so that the SWR is  
1.5:1 or less. High SWR will cause the transmit output  
to drop and may lead to radio frequency interference  
with consumer products such as stereo receivers  
and televisions. You may even cause interference  
with your own transceiver. Reports that your signal is  
distorted could indicate that your antenna system is  
not efficiently radiating your transceiver’s power.  
'&ꢀ32:(5ꢀ6833/<ꢀ&211(&7,21  
In order to use this transceiver, you need a separate  
13.8 V DC power supply that must be purchased  
separately. Do not directly connect the transceiver  
to an AC outlet. Use the supplied DC power cable to  
connect the transceiver to a regulated power supply.  
Do not substitute a cable with smaller gauge wires.  
The current capacity of the power supply must be  
20.5 A peak or more.  
Connect your primary HF/ 50 MHz antenna feed  
line to ANT 1 on the rear of the transceiver. If you  
are using two HF/ 50 MHz antennas, connect the  
secondary antenna to ANT 2. Refer to page 9 for the  
location of the antenna connectors.  
The LF band is outputed only from the DRV terminal.  
Note:  
X
X
X
Transmitting without connecting an antenna or other  
matched load may damage the transceiver. Always connect  
the antenna to the transceiver before transmitting.  
All fixed stations should be equipped with a lightning arrester  
to reduce the risk of fire, electric shock, and transceiver  
damage.  
The transceiver’s protection circuit will activate when  
the SWR is greater than 1.5:1; however, do not rely on  
protection to compensate for a poorly functioning antenna  
system.  
First, connect the DC power cable to the regulated DC  
power supply; the red lead to the positive terminal and  
the black lead to the negative terminal. Next, connect  
the DC power cable to the transceiver’s DC power  
connector.  
•
Press the connectors firmly until the locking tab  
clicks.  
•
Attach the line filter to the DC cable as shown  
below (E-type only).  
*5281'ꢀ&211(&7,21  
Note:  
X
Before connecting the DC power supply to the transceiver,  
be sure to switch OFF the DC power supply and transceiver.  
At a minimum, a good DC ground is required to  
prevent such dangers as electric shock. For superior  
communications, a good RF ground is required  
against which the antenna system can operate. Both  
of these conditions can be met by providing a good  
earth ground for your station. Bury one or more  
ground rods or a large copper plate under the ground,  
then connect this to the transceiver GND terminal.  
Use heavy gauge wire or a copper strap, cut as short  
as possible, for this connection. Do not use a gas  
pipe, an electrical conduit, or a plastic water pipe as a  
ground.  
X
Do not plug the DC power supply into an AC outlet until you  
make all connections.  
Fuse (25 A)  
E-type only  
ï
Black ( )  
Red (+)  
DC Power supply  
(20.5 A or more)  
TS-590S  
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ꢁꢀꢀ,167$//$7,21  
87,/,=,1*ꢀ7+(ꢀ%$,/  
$&&(6625<ꢀ&211(&7,216  
)5217ꢀ3$1(/  
This transceiver is equipped with a bail so that you  
can angle the transceiver. The bail is located on the  
bottom of the transceiver. Pull the bail forward to the  
limit as shown.  
Qꢀ +HDGSKRQHVꢀꢂ3+21(6ꢃ  
Connect monaural or stereo headphones with a  
ꢆꢀWRꢀꢇꢈꢀŸꢀLPSHGDQFHꢁꢀꢀ7KLVꢀMDFNꢀDFFHSWVꢀDꢀꢉꢁꢇꢀPPꢀ  
(1/4") diameter, 2-conductor (mono) or 3-conductor  
(stereo) plug. After connecting the headphones,  
you will hear no sound from the internal (or  
optional external) Speaker/Microphone (MIC).  
Qꢀ 0LFURSKRQHꢀꢂ0,&ꢃ  
ꢀ
&RQQHFWꢀDꢀPLFURSKRQHꢀZLWKꢀDꢀꢈꢂꢃꢀWRꢀꢉꢃꢃꢀŸꢀ  
impedance. Fully insert the connector, then  
screw the retaining ring clockwise until secure.  
Compatible microphones include the MC-43S,  
0&ꢅꢆꢊꢄꢀ0&ꢅꢂꢈ'0ꢄꢀ0&ꢅꢉꢃ$ꢄꢀ0&ꢅꢋꢃꢄꢀ0&ꢅꢋꢂꢄꢀDQGꢀ  
MC-90.  
Note: Do not use the MC-44, MC-44DM, MC-45, MC-45E,  
MC-45DM, MC-45DME, or MC-53DM microphones.  
5(3/$&,1*ꢀ)86(6ꢀ  
5($5ꢀ3$1(/  
The following fuses are used in the TS-590S  
transceiver. If a fuse blows, determine the cause  
then correct the problem. Only after the problem has  
been resolved, replace the blown fuse with a new  
one with the specified ratings. If newly installed fuses  
continue to blow, disconnect the power plug and  
contact a Kenwood service center or your dealer for  
assistance.  
Qꢀ ([WHUQDOꢀ6SHDNHUꢀꢂ(;7ꢄ63ꢃ  
On the rear panel of the transceiver, there is an  
external speaker jack. If an external speaker is  
connected to EXP.SP, the transceiver internal  
speaker will mute. Use only external speakers with  
DQꢀLPSHGDQFHꢀRIꢀꢆꢀWRꢀꢋꢀŸꢀꢌꢋꢀŸꢀQRPLQDOꢍꢁꢀꢀ7KLVꢀMDFNꢀ  
accepts only 3.5 mm (1/8") diameter, 2-conductor  
(mono) plugs.  
Fuse Location  
TS-590S Transceiver  
Supplied DC power cable  
Fuse Current Rating  
4 A  
(for external  
antenna tuner)  
Do not connect headphones to this jack. The high audio  
output of this jack could damage your hearing.  
25 A  
Qꢀ .H\VꢀIRUꢀ&:ꢀꢂ3$''/(ꢀDQGꢀ.(<ꢃ  
For CW operation while using the internal  
electronic keyer, connect a keyer paddle to the  
PADDLE jack.  
Fuse (4 A)  
For CW operation without using the internal  
electronic keyer, connect a straight key,  
semi-automatic key (bug), electronic keyer,  
or the CW keyed output from a Multimode  
Communications Processor (MCP) to the KEY  
jack.  
ꢀ
7KHꢀ3$''/(ꢀDQGꢀ.(<ꢀMDFNVꢀPDWHꢀZLWKꢀDꢀꢉꢁꢇꢀPPꢀ  
(1/4") 3-conductor plug and a 3.5 mm (1/8")  
2-conductor plug, respectively. External electronic  
keyers or MCPs must use positive keying to be  
compatible with this transceiver. Use a shielded  
cable between the key and the transceiver.  
Fuse (25 A)  
Fuse (25 A)  
Note: Due to the functionality of the internal electronic  
keyer, you may find it unnecessary to connect both a paddle  
and another type of keyer unless you want to use a  
PC-based keyer for CW. Read the “ELECTRONIC KEYER”  
section {page 33} to become familiar with the internal keyer.  
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ꢁꢀꢀ,167$//$7,21  
Headphones  
Front Panel  
2
>
B
=
GND (STBY)  
GND (MIC)  
NC  
MIC  
:
@
.
PTT  
DOWN  
UP  
8 V (10 mA max)  
;
MIC connector (Front view)  
External speaker  
Microphone  
Rear Panel  
•
Paddle  
•
•
•
•
Straight key  
Bug key  
Electronic keyer  
PC keyer output  
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
*(77,1*ꢀ$&48$,17('  
)5217ꢀ3$1(/  
A
G
H
C
D
E
F
B
—— A ——  
—— C ——  
[ ]  
[METER (DRV)]  
Press to switch the meter type. Press and hold to turn  
the Drive Out function ON or OFF {page 50}.  
Press and hold to switch the transceiver power ON  
and OFF {page 10}.  
[PF A]  
[PF B]  
You can assign a function to this Programmable  
Function key {page 54}.  
You can assign a function to this Programmable  
Function key {page 54}.  
[ATT (RX ANT)]  
[MIC (CAR)]  
Press to turn the receiver attenuator ON or OFF  
{page 40}. Press and hold to enable or disable the  
RX-ANT terminal {page 50}.  
Press to adjust the microphone gain {page 13}. While  
the Speech Processor function is ON, press to adjust  
the Speech Processor output level {page 31}. Press  
and hold to adjust the carrier level {page 23}.  
[PRE (ANT 1/2)]  
Press to turn the pre-amplifier ON or OFF {page 40}.  
Press and hold to select either ANT 1 or ANT 2  
{page 50}.  
[PWR (TX MONI)]  
Press to adjust the transmission output power  
{pages 13, 55}. Press and hold to turn the  
transmission signal monitor function ON or OFF  
{page 56}.  
[VOX (LEV)]  
In voice mode, press to turn the VOX (Voice-Operated  
Transmit) function ON or OFF {page 30}. In CW  
mode, press to turn the Break-in function ON or OFF  
{page 32}. Press and hold to adjust the microphone  
input gain for VOX operation.  
[KEY (DELAY)]  
Press to adjust the internal electronic keyer speed  
{page 33}. Press and hold to adjust the VOX delay  
time for voice mode {page 30} or Break-in time (Full  
Break-in/ Semi Break-in time) for CW mode.  
[PROC (LEV)]  
Press to turn the Speech Processor ON or OFF  
{page 31}. Press and hold to adjust the Speech  
Processor input level.  
[GENE]  
Press to select the general coverage band memory  
{page 11}.  
[SEND]  
[1.8 (1)]  
Press to turn transmission ON or OFF.  
Press to select the 1.8 MHz band memory {page 11}  
or enter keypad number 1.  
[AT (TUNE)]  
Press to turn the internal antenna tuner ON or  
OFF {page 50}. Press and hold to start tuning the  
automatic antenna tuner.  
[3.5 (2)]  
Press to select the 3.5 MHz band memory {page 11}  
or enter keypad number 2.  
[7 (3)]  
—— B ——  
Press to select the 7 MHz band memory {page 11} or  
enter keypad number 3.  
PHONES jack  
Mate with a 6.3 mm (1/4") diameter, 2-conductor  
(mono) or 3-conductor (stereo) plug for connecting a  
set of headphones {page 2}.  
[10 (4)]  
Press to select the 10 MHz band memory {page 11} or  
enter keypad number 4.  
MIC connector  
[14 (5)]  
Connect a microphone to this connector {page 2}.  
Press to select the 14 MHz band memory {page 11} or  
enter keypad number 5.  
[18 (6)]  
Press to select the 18 MHz band memory {page 11} or  
enter keypad number 6.  
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ꢅꢀꢀ*(77,1*ꢀ$&48$,17('  
[21 (7)]  
[NB (LEV)]  
Press to select the 21 MHz band memory {page 11} or  
enter keypad number 7.  
Press to cycle through Noise Blanker 1, Noise Blanker  
2, and OFF. Press and hold to adjust the Noise  
Blanker level {page 40}.  
[24 (8)]  
Press to select the 24 MHz band memory {page 11} or  
enter keypad number 8.  
[NR (LEV)]  
Press to cycle through the DSP Noise Reduction  
types: NR1, NR2, or OFF {page 39}. When the  
Noise Reduction function is turned ON, press and  
hold to change the parameters of the Noise Reduction  
function {page 39}.  
[28 (9)]  
Press to select the 28 MHz band memory {page 11} or  
enter keypad number 9.  
[50 (0)]  
[BC (A.NOTCH)]  
Press to select the 50 MHz band memory {page 11} or  
enter keypad number 0.  
Press to select the DSP Beat Cancel function, BC1  
(Beat Cancel 1), BC2 (Beat Cancel 2) or OFF  
{page 39}. Press and hold to toggle the Auto  
Notch Filter ON and OFF {page 39}.  
[CLR]  
Press to exit from, abort, or reset various functions.  
Press and hold to clear a memory channel {page 44}.  
[NOTCH (WIDE)]  
[ENT]  
Press to toggle the IF Notch Filter ON or OFF  
{page 39}. Press and hold to set up the IF Notch  
bandwidth {page 39}.  
Press to enter your desired frequency using the  
10-key keypad {page 28}.  
[SPLIT]  
—— D ——  
Press to enter split-frequency operation, allowing  
you to use different transmission and reception  
frequencies {page 24}.  
[LSB/USB]  
Press to select LSB or USB mode {page 11}.  
[CW/FSK (REV)]  
[TF-SET]  
Press to select CW or FSK mode {page 11}. Press  
and hold to select a sideband (CW/ CW-R or FSK/  
FSK-R).  
During split-frequency operation, press to monitor or  
change your transmit frequency {page 24}.  
[A/B (A=B)]  
[FM/AM (FM-N)]  
Press to select FM or AM mode {page 11}. Press and  
hold to select Narrow FM mode.  
Press to select either VFO A or VFO B {page 24}.  
Press and hold to duplicate the data in the current  
VFO to the other VFO {page 25}. While in Menu  
mode, press to select Menu A or Menu B. While in  
Program Memory Channel mode, press to recall the  
start or end frequency.  
[DATA]  
Press to select a Data mode (LSB/ LSB-DATA, USB/  
USB-DATA, or FM/ FM-DATA) {page 11}.  
[M/V]  
[FINE (F.LOCK)]  
Press to toggle between Memory and VFO modes.  
Press to activate the Fine tuning function to allow  
more precise tuning {page 29}. Press and hold to  
activate the Frequency Lock function {page 53}.  
[M.IN]  
Press to enter Memory Scroll mode and to store data  
to a Memory channel {page 41}.  
—— E ——  
Central (Tuning) control  
Turn to select the desired frequency {page 12}. Use  
the convenient finger-tip cavity for continuous tuning.  
Slide the lever underneath the Tuning control to the  
left or right to adjust the torque level of the control.  
Left makes the control light and right makes it heavy.  
[M>V]  
Press to transfer the current Memory Channel  
contents to the VFO.  
[Q-M.IN]  
Press to store data to the Quick Memory.  
[Q-MR]  
Press to recall data from the Quick Memory, while in  
VFO mode. Press to enter Memory Name Edit mode,  
while in Memory Channel mode.  
light  
heavy  
[MHz]  
TX-RX LED  
Press to turn the MHz Up/ Down function ON or OFF.  
The MHz digit increases or decreases when you turn  
the MULTI/CH control. In Menu mode, press to turn  
the Quick Menu ON or OFF {page 14}.  
Lights red while transmitting and green when the  
squelch opens while receiving.  
—— F ——  
[SCAN (SG.SEL)]  
Press to start or stop the Scan function {page 46}.  
Press and hold to select a Scan group {page 49}.  
[IF FIL]  
Press to toggle between IF Filter A and IF Filter B  
{page 38}. You can adjust the filter bandwidth using  
the LO/WIDTH and HI/SHIFT controls. Press and  
hold [IF FIL] to momentarily display each setting value  
of the current DSP filter DSP filter bandwidth {page  
38}.  
[MENU]  
Press to enter Menu mode {page 14}.  
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ꢅꢀꢀ*(77,1*ꢀ$&48$,17('  
A
B
G
H
C
D
E
F
RIT/ XIT control  
[CH1 (REC)]  
When the RIT/ XIT function is ON, turn to adjust  
the offset frequency. The RIT/ XIT offset frequency  
appears on the sub-display {pages 29, 31}. While  
scanning, turn to adjust the scan speed.  
Press to play back a CW {page 34} or voice message  
(requires VGS-1 option) {page 58}. Press and hold  
to record a CW {page 34} or voice message (requires  
VGS-1 option) {page 59}.  
[CH2 (REC)]  
—— H ——  
Press to play back a CW {page 34} or voice message  
(requires VGS-1 option) {page 59}. Press and hold  
to record a CW {page 34} or voice message (requires  
VGS-1 option) {page 59}.  
SQL control  
Turn to select the desired squelch level {page 12}.  
NOTCH control  
Turn to select the desired Notch frequency {page 39}.  
[CH3 (REC)]  
Press to play back a CW {page 34} or voice message  
(requires VGS-1 option) {page 59}. Press and hold  
to record a CW {page 34} or voice message (requires  
VGS-1 option) {page 59}.  
MULTI/CH control  
In VFO mode, rotate to step the operating frequency  
up or down {page 28}. In Memory Channel mode,  
rotate to select a Memory Channel {page 41}.  
Also, used for selecting Menu numbers when  
accessing the Menu mode {page 14} and for various  
configurations. The MULTI/CH LED lights when the  
MULTI/CH control is not being used to adjust the step  
frequency.  
[RX/4 (REC)]  
Press to play back a CW {page 34} or voice message  
(requires VGS-1 option) {page 59}, or the constantly  
recorded signal (requires VGS-1 option) {page 60}.  
Press and hold to activate the constant recorder  
(requires VGS-1 option) {page 60}.  
HI/SHIFT control  
Rotate to adjust the DSP filter bandwidth (high-cut) or  
to adjust the DSP filter bandwidth (filter band shift)  
{page 38}.  
—— G ——  
[AGC/T (SEL)]  
Press to toggle the fast or slow response time for  
the Automatic Gain Control (AGC) {page 29}. In  
FM mode, press to cycle through the Tone settings:  
Tone, CTCSS, CTCSSx, or OFF {page 26}. When  
Tone is activated in FM mode, press and hold to  
select a Tone frequency {page 26}. When CTCSS  
is activated in FM mode, press and hold to select a  
CTCSS frequency {page 27}.  
LO/WIDTH control  
Rotate to adjust the DSP filter bandwidth (high-cut or  
shift) {page 38}.  
AF control  
Turn to adjust the AF gain level {page 10}.  
RF control  
Turn to adjust the RF gain level {page 10}.  
[CW T. (AGC OFF)]  
Press to start CW auto tuning {page 23}. Press and  
hold to turn AGC OFF {page 29}.  
[RIT]  
Press to turn the RIT (Receive Incremental Tuning)  
function ON or OFF {page 29}.  
[XIT]  
Press to turn the XIT (Transmit Incremental Tuning)  
function ON or OFF {page 31}.  
[CL]  
Press to clear the RIT/ XIT frequency to zero  
{pages 29, 31}.  
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ꢅꢀꢀ*(77,1*ꢀ$&48$,17('  
/&'ꢀ',63/$<  
A
E
B
C
D
F
—— A ——  
Appears when the Noise Blanker 1 or 2 is ON  
{page 40}.  
While receiving, the meter serves as an S-meter to  
measure and display the received signal strength.  
While transmitting, it serves as a power meter plus an  
ALC meter, an SWR meter, or a Speech Processor  
compression meter. The Peak Hold function holds  
each reading for approximately half a second. While  
adjusting the IF filter bandwidth, the meter displays an  
adjustment state.  
“
” (fast) or “  
” (slow) appears when the  
Automatic Gain Control function is ON. “  
appears when the AGC is OFF {page 29}.  
”
Appears when IF filter A is selected {page 39}.  
Appears when IF filter B is selected {page 39}.  
—— B ——  
—— D ——  
Appears when the Auto Mode function is ON and  
while in Auto Mode frequency setup {page 51}.  
“
” appears when manual notch is set to Normal.  
” appears when Manual Notch is set to Wide.  
” appears when Auto Notch is selected {page  
“
“
39}.  
Displays the operating mode (USB, LSB, FM, AM,  
CW, CWR, FSK, or FSR) {page 11}.  
Appears when the Fine Tuning function is ON {page  
29}.  
Appears while in Menu mode {page 14}.  
Appears when the MHz Step function is ON {page  
28}. Also appears when the Quick Menu function is  
ON {page 14}.  
Appears while in Memory Scroll mode {page 42}.  
Appears while in Memory Channel mode or Memory  
Scroll mode {page 42}.  
“
” or “  
” appears, depending on whether  
DSP Noise Reduction 1 or Noise Reduction 2 is  
selected {page 39}.  
In normal operating mode and various configuration  
modes, it displays the Memory Channel number,  
Quick Memory number, and entry log number. In  
Menu mode, it displays the Menu No.  
“
” appears when the RX Equalizer function is ON  
{page 55}. “ ” appears when the TX Equalizer  
function is ON {page 32}.  
—— C ——  
Appears while in Data mode {page 38}.  
Appears while in narrow FM mode {page 11}.  
“
” or “  
” appears, when you select the DSP  
Beat Cancel 1 or Beat Cancel 2 {page 39}.  
“ ” appears when the Tone function is ON {page 25},  
and blinks during Tone scan. “ ” appears when the  
CTCSS (Continuous Tone Coded Squelch System)  
function is ON, and blinks during CTCSS scan {page  
26}. “  
ON {page 27}.  
Appears when the receiver pre-amplifier is ON {page  
40}.  
” appears when the Cross Tone function is  
Appears when the receiver’s attenuator is ON {page  
40}.  
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ꢅꢀꢀ*(77,1*ꢀ$&48$,17('  
A
B
C
D
E
F
—— F ——  
Appears when the VOX (Voice Operated  
Transmission) function is ON or the Break-in function  
is ON for CW mode {page 30}.  
(Main DIsplay)  
In normal operating mode and various configuration  
modes, it displays the transceiver operating  
frequency. In Menu mode, it displays the various  
menus, and in Adjustment mode, it displays the  
adjustment values.  
Appears when the Frequency Lock function is ON  
{page 53}.  
Appears when the Speech Processor function is ON  
{page 31}.  
(Sub-display)  
When recalling a memory channel, it displays  
the Memory Channel name (if one has been  
programmed). During split frequency operation,  
it displays the frequency. When the following  
indications occur simultaneously, information is  
displayed in the following order: RIT/XIT frequency,  
Split frequency, Memory Name. In Menu mode, it  
displays a menu title. In other modes, it displays the  
configuration parameters.  
Appears when the constant recording function is ON  
{page 60}.  
Reserved for future updates.  
Appears when the selected Menu No. is in the  
Quick Menu list {page 14}. It also appears when the  
transceiver is scanning the frequencies between the  
slow down frequency points {page 47}.  
Appears when the split-frequency operation is ON  
{page 24}.  
Appears when Receive Incremental Tuning function is  
ON {page 29}.  
“
” appears while VFO A is selected. “  
”
appears while transmitting on a split channel in VFO  
A {page 10}. “ ” appears while Menu A is being  
accessed in Menu mode {page 14}.  
Appears when Transmit Incremental Tuning function  
is ON {page 31}.  
—— E ——  
“
” appears while VFO B is selected. “  
” appears  
while transmitting on a split channel in VFO B {page  
10}. “ ” appears while Menu B is being accessed in  
Menu mode {page 14}.  
Appears when the RX ANT terminal is enabled {page  
50}.  
Either “  
” or “  
” appears, depending on  
“
” appears while a simplex memory channel  
is selected. “ ” appears while a split memory  
channel is selected {page 41}.  
which antenna connector is selected {page 50}.  
“
”
appears while the internal antenna tuner  
{page 61} is in-line for operation. ” appears while  
“
receiving when the internal antenna tuner is in-line for  
operation. “ ” and “ ” blink while tuning is in progress  
{page 50}  
.
Appears when the DRV terminal is enabled {page 50}.  
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ꢅꢀꢀ*(77,1*ꢀ$&48$,17('  
5($5ꢀ3$1(/  
ANT 1 and ANT 2 connectors  
DRV connector  
Connect your primary HF/ 50 MHz antenna to ANT 1  
connector. If you are using 2 antennas for the HF/  
50 MHz band, connect the secondary antenna to the  
ANT 2 connector {page 1}.  
Connect an antenna drive device to this connector  
{page 50}.  
RX ANT connector  
Connect an RX antenna to this connector {page 50}.  
GND post  
Connect a heavy gauge wire or copper strap between  
the ground post and the nearest earth ground {page 1}.  
0,&523+21(  
AT connector  
Mates with the connector from the cable supplied with  
the AT-300 external antenna tuner {pages 66, 68}.  
Refer to the instruction manual supplied with the tuner  
for more information.  
DC 13.8 V connector  
Connect a regulated 13.8 V DC power source to this  
connector {page 1}. Use the DC cable supplied with  
the transceiver.  
COM connector  
Mates with a DB-9 female connector for connecting a  
computer or compatible transceiver {pages 57, 65}.  
Also used with the Quick Data Transfer function {page  
57} and DX PacketCluster Tune function {page 63}.  
(USB) connector  
Mates with a USB connector for connecting a  
computer via one of its USB ports {pages 57, 67}.  
PTT (Push-to-Talk) switch  
(;7ꢀ63ꢁꢂŸ jack  
Mate with a 3.5 mm (1/8"), 2-conductor (mono) plug  
for connecting an external speaker {page 2}.  
The transceiver is placed in Transmission mode when  
this non-locking switch is held down. Releasing the  
switch returns the transceiver to Reception mode.  
ACC 2 connector  
/
Mic [UP]/ [DWN]  
Mates with a 13-pin male DIN connector for  
connecting various accessory equipment, such as  
an external TNC/ MCP or a RTTY terminal  
{page 65}.  
Use these keys to step the VFO frequency, Memory  
Channels, or Menu selections up and down.  
Press and hold these keys to continuously change the  
settings.  
You can also change the operational function of these  
keys {page 54}  
REMOTE connector  
Mates with a 7-pin male DIN connector for connecting  
an HF/ 50 MHz linear amplifier {page 65, 68}.  
KEY and PADDLE jacks  
The KEY jack mates with a 3.5 mm (1/8") 2-conductor  
plug for connecting an external key for CW operation.  
The PADDLE jack mates with a 6.3 mm (1/4")  
3-conductor plug for connecting a keyer paddle to  
the internal electronic keyer. Refer to “Keys for CW  
(PADDLE and KEY)” {page 2} before using these jacks.  
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
23(5$7,1*ꢀ%$6,&6  
5)ꢀꢂ5$',2ꢀ)5(48(1&<ꢃꢀ*$,1  
6:,7&+,1*ꢀ32:(5ꢀ21ꢆꢀ2))  
1 Switch the DC power supply ON.  
2 Press [ ] to switch the transceiver ON.  
The RF gain is normally configured to the maximum  
level regardless of the operating modes. The  
transceiver has been configured to the maximum  
level at the factory. However, you may decrease the  
RF gain slightly when you have trouble hearing the  
desired signal due to excessive atmospheric noise or  
interference from other stations.  
•
If you hold the power switch for more than  
approximately 2 seconds, the transceiver will  
switch back OFF.  
•
Upon power up, “HELLO” appears on the main  
display, followed by the current frequency and  
other indicators.  
First, take note of the peak S-meter reading of  
the desired signal. Then, turn the RF control  
counterclockwise until the S-meter reads the peak  
value that you noted.  
3 To switch the transceiver OFF, press [ ] again.  
4 Switch the DC power supply OFF.  
•
Signals that are weaker than this level will be  
attenuated and reception of the station will become  
easier.  
•
You may skip step 3. After switching the  
transceiver ON, you can switch it OFF or ON  
using only the power switch of the DC power  
supply. The transceiver remembers the power  
switch position when the DC power source is  
switched OFF.  
Depending on the type and gain of your antenna and  
the condition of the band, adjust the RF gain. When  
using FM mode, always adjust the RF gain to the  
maximum level.  
$'-867,1*ꢀ7+(ꢀ92/80(  
6(/(&7,1*ꢀ9)2ꢀ$ꢀ25ꢀ9)2ꢀ%  
Two VFOs are available for controlling the frequency  
on the transceiver. Each VFO (VFO A and VFO B)  
works independently so that a different frequency and  
mode can be selected. For example, when SPLIT  
operation is activated, VFO A is used for reception  
and VFO B is used for transmission. The opposite  
combination is also possible.  
$)ꢀꢂ$8',2ꢀ)5(48(1&<ꢃꢀ*$,1  
Turn the AF control clockwise to increase the audio  
level and counterclockwise to decrease it.  
Press [A/B (A=B)] to toggle between VFO A and B.  
Note: The position of the AF control does not affect the volume  
of beeps caused by pressing keys nor the CW TX sidetone. The  
audio level for Digital mode operation is also independent of the  
AF control setting.  
10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ꢇꢀꢀ23(5$7,1*ꢀ%$6,&6  
6(/(&7,1*ꢀ$ꢀ%$1'  
6(/(&7,1*ꢀ$ꢀ02'(  
Press [1.8 (1)] ~ [50 (0)] or [GENE] to select your  
desired band.  
Press one of the following keys to select your desired  
mode set: [LSB/USB], [CW/FSK (REV)], or [FM/AM  
(FM-N)].  
[LSB/USB]  
Press to select LSB or USB mode. Press again to  
toggle between LSB and USB mode.  
While in LSB mode, press [DATA] to toggle between  
LSB and LSB-DATA mode. Likewise, while in USB  
mode press [DATA] to toggle between USB and USB-  
DATA mode.  
Additionally, while in LSB-DATA or USB-DATA mode,  
you can press [LSB/USB] to toggle between LSB-  
DATA and USB-DATA mode.  
•
•
Press each key to cycle through the 3 default  
settings as shown in the table below.  
Each setting can be modified with your personal  
preference for frequency and mode. After  
modifying the setting, pressing the key again will  
save that setting.  
[CW/FSK (REV)]  
Press to select CW or FSK mode. Press again to  
toggle between CW and FSK mode.  
While in CW mode, press and hold [CW/FSK (REV)]  
to toggle between CW and CW-R mode. Likewise,  
while in FSK mode press and hold [CW/FSK (REV] to  
toggle between FSK and FSK-R mode.  
Additionally, while in CW-R or FSK-R mode, you can  
press [CW/FSK (REV)] to toggle between CW-R and  
FSK-R mode.  
Default Setting (MHz)/  
Mode  
Frequency  
Range  
Type  
Key  
(MHz)  
1
2
3
1.8/  
CW  
1.82/  
CW  
1.84/  
CW  
K
E
1.62 ~ 2  
3 ~ 4  
[1.8 (1)]  
[FM/AM (FM-N)]  
Press to select FM or AM mode. Press again to  
toggle between FM and AM mode.  
1.83/  
CW  
1.84/  
CW  
1.81/  
CW  
3.8/  
While in FM mode, press and hold [FM/AM (FM-N)]  
to toggle between FM and FM-NAR mode, or press  
[DATA] to toggle between FM and FM-DATA mode.  
Additionally, while in FM-NAR mode, press [DATA] to  
toggle between FM-NAR and FM-NAR-DATA mode  
and while in FM-DATA mode, press and hold [FM/AM  
(FM-N)] to toggle between FM-DATA and FM-NAR-  
DATA mode.  
K
LSB  
3.5/  
LSB  
3.7/  
LSB  
[3.5 (2)]  
[7 (3)]  
3.79/  
LSB  
E
7.1/  
LSB  
7.2/  
K
LSB  
7.0/  
LSB  
6.5 ~ 7.5  
10 ~ 10.5  
7.05/  
LSB  
7.1/  
E
LSB  
10.1/ 10.12/ 10.14/  
CW  
All  
[10 (4)]  
[14 (5)]  
[18 (6)]  
[21 (7)]  
[24 (8)]  
[28 (9)]  
CW  
CW  
14.0/  
USB  
14.1/  
USB  
14.2/  
USB  
All 13.5 ~ 14.5  
18.068/ 18.11/ 18.15/  
USB USB USB  
All  
18 ~ 19  
Access Menu No. 23 then press [M.IN] to select “on”  
21.0/ 21.15/ 21.3/  
USB USB USB  
All 20.5 ~ 21.5  
to turn the Auto Mode selection ON. When it is ON,  
“
” appears. As a default, if you change the  
24.89/ 24.93/ 24.95/  
USB  
All  
All  
K
24 ~ 25  
frequency above or below 9.5 MHz, the transceiver  
automatically switches modes; LSB for frequencies  
under 9.5 MHz and USB for frequencies 9.5 MHz and  
over. You can further add the frequency borders to the  
Auto Mode selection {page 51}.  
USB  
USB  
28/  
USB  
28.3/  
USB  
29/  
FM  
27.5 ~ 30  
50.125/  
USB  
50/  
USB  
51/  
FM  
50 ~ 54  
[50 (0)]  
[GENE]  
50.15/  
USB  
E
5.3305/  
USB  
K
0.1357/  
CW  
5.4305/  
USB  
0.03 ~ 60  
5.2585/  
USB  
E
11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ꢇꢀꢀ23(5$7,1*ꢀ%$6,&6  
$'-867,1*ꢀ7+(ꢀ648(/&+  
08/7,ꢈ)81&7,21ꢀ0(7(5  
The purpose of the Squelch is to mute the speaker  
when no signals are present. With the squelch level  
correctly set, you will hear sound only while actually  
receiving signals. The higher the selected squelch  
level, the stronger the signals must be to receive. The  
appropriate squelch level depends on the ambient RF  
noise conditions.  
The multi-function meter measures the parameters  
in the table below. The S-meter and FILTER scales  
appears when the transceiver is in receive mode, and  
the PWR meter appears when it is in transmit mode.  
Each press of [METER (DRV)] cycles between the  
ALC, COMP, and SWR meters. Peak readings for the  
S-meter, ALC, SWR, COMP, and PWR functions are  
held momentarily.  
Turn the SQL control when there are no signals  
present to select the squelch level at which the  
background noise is just eliminated; the green TX-RX  
LED will turn off. Many ham operators prefer leaving  
the SQL control fully counterclockwise unless  
operating on a full-carrier mode such as FM. The  
squelch level for the transceiver is preset at the  
factory to approximately the 9 o’clock position for FM  
and 11 o’clock for SSB and AM.  
ALC  
COMP  
781,1*ꢀ$ꢀ)5(48(1&<  
Turn the Tuning control clockwise or press Mic [UP  
to increase the frequency. Turn the Tuning control  
counterclockwise or press Mic [DWN] to decrease the  
frequency.  
SWR  
Meter Name  
S
Parameters Measured  
Strength of received signals  
Transmission output power  
PWR  
ALC  
Automatic level control status  
Antenna system standing wave ratio  
SWR  
Speech compression level when  
using the Speech Processor  
{page 31}  
You may prefer directly entering a frequency using  
the numeric keypad if the desired frequency is far  
from the current frequency. Press [ENT], then press  
the numeric keys as necessary. For details, refer to  
“Direct Frequency Entry” {page 28}.  
COMP  
FILTER  
IF filter width {page 38}  
Note:  
X
The COMP meter functions only when the Speech  
Processor is ON for SSB, FM, or AM mode.  
X
X
Peak Hold readings cannot be deactivated.  
The S-meter responds differently in FM mode, compared to  
other modes. This is not a malfunction.  
12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ꢇꢀꢀ23(5$7,1*ꢀ%$6,&6  
0,&523+21(ꢀ*$,1  
75$160,77,1*  
The microphone gain must be adjusted when SSB  
or AM mode is selected without using the speech  
processor {pages 21, 22}.  
For voice communications, press and hold Mic [PTT]  
and speak into the microphone in your normal voice.  
When you finish speaking, release Mic [PTT] to  
receive.  
1 Press [MIC (CAR)].  
To transmit CW, press [VOX (REV)] to turn the Break-  
in function ON. “  
” appears. Close the key or  
keyer paddle. Connect a key or keyer paddle {page  
2}, then select CW using [CW/FSK (REV)].  
For a detailed explanation on transmitting, refer to  
“BASIC COMMUNICATIONS”, beginning on page 21.  
6(/(&7,1*ꢀ75$160,66,21ꢀ32:(5  
•
The current microphone gain level appears.  
The range is from 0 to 100 with a default of 50.  
It is wise to select a lower transmission power if  
communication is still reliable. This lowers the risk of  
interfering with others on the band. When operating  
from battery power, selecting a lower transmission  
power allows you more operating time before  
recharging is necessary. This transceiver allows  
you to change the transmission power even while  
transmitting.  
2 Press and hold Mic [PTT].  
The TX-RX LED lights red.  
•
1 Press [PWR (TX MONI)].  
3 SSB: While speaking into the microphone, adjust  
the MULTI/CH control so that the ALC meter  
reflects your voice level but does not exceed the  
ALC limit.  
AM: While speaking into the microphone, adjust  
the MULTI/CH control so that the power meter  
slightly reflects your voice level.  
FM: Access Menu No. 47 and select “1” (Normal),  
“2” (Medium), or “3” (High) for the microphone gain  
if necessary {page 21}.  
•
The current transmission power appears.  
2 Turn the MULTI/CH control counterclockwise to  
reduce the power or clockwise to increase the  
power.  
4 Release Mic [PTT] to receive.  
•
The TX-RX LED lights green or turns off,  
depending on the SQL control setting.  
5 Press [MIC (CAR)] or [CLR] to exit the Microphone  
gain adjustment.  
Note: When using the MC-90 microphone in FM mode, select  
“3” (High) for the microphone gain. The microphone sensitivity  
is low in FM mode. This may cause insufficient modulation. For  
other microphones, select either “1” (Normal) or “2” (Medium).  
3 Press [PWR (TX MONI)] or [CLR] to complete the  
setting.  
Note: You can access Menu No. 48, and select “on” to change  
the step size from 5 W to 1 W {page 56}.  
13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
0(18ꢀ6(783  
:+$7ꢀ,6ꢀ$ꢀ0(18"  
48,&.ꢀ0(18  
Many functions on this transceiver are selected or  
configured via a software-controlled Menu, rather than  
through the physical controls of the transceiver. Once  
familiar with the Menu system, you will appreciate the  
versatility it offers. You can customize the various  
timings, settings, and programming functions on this  
transceiver to meet your needs without using many  
controls and switches.  
Because the number of functions this transceiver  
provides is extraordinary, there are numerous items  
in each Menu. If you find accessing desired Menu  
Nos. to be too time consuming, use the Quick Menu to  
create your own customized, abbreviated Menu. You  
can then add those Menu Nos. which you frequently  
use, to the Quick Menu. Copying Menu Nos. to the  
Quick Menu has no effect on the Menu.  
352*5$00,1*ꢀ7+(ꢀ48,&.ꢀ0(18  
1 Press [MENU].  
0(18ꢀ$ꢆꢀ0(18ꢀ%  
This transceiver has 2 menus: Menu A and Menu B.  
These menus contain identical functions and can be  
configured independently. The transceiver, therefore,  
allows you to switch between 2 different environments  
quickly and easily. For example, you can configure  
Menu A for DXing and contesting while Menu B is  
for relaxed local ragchewing. By switching from  
Menu A to Menu B, you can instantly change the  
Menu configuration and key assignment to suit your  
current operating style. Or, 2 operators may share  
a single transceiver by dedicating one Menu to each  
operator. Both operators can always enjoy their own  
configuration.  
2 Press [Q-M.IN]/ [Q-MR] or turn the MULTI/CH  
control to select the desired Menu No.  
3 Press [FINE (F.LOCK)].  
•
“ ” appears, indicating that the Menu item has  
been added to the Quick Menu.  
•
To remove the item from the Quick Menu, press  
[FINE (F.LOCK)] again. “ ” disappears.  
4 Press [MENU] to exit Menu mode.  
86,1*ꢀ7+(ꢀ48,&.ꢀ0(18  
1 Press [MENU].  
0(18ꢀ$&&(66  
1 Press [MENU].  
2 Press [MHz].  
•
The Menu No. and setting appear on the  
display, and the explanation of the menu  
appears on the sub-display.  
•
“
” appears.  
3 Press [Q-M.IN]/ [Q-MR] or turn the MULTI/CH  
2 Press [A/B (A=B)] to select Menu A or B.  
control to select the desired Quick Menu No.  
•
“ ” or “ ” appears, indicating which Menu is  
selected.  
4 Press [M.IN]/ [SCAN (SG.SEL)], or Mic [UP]/  
[DWN] to change the current setting for the  
selected Menu No.  
3 Press [Q-M.IN]/ [Q-MR] or turn the MULTI/CH  
control to select the desired Menu No.  
•
When the Menu is registered to the Quick Menu  
list, “ ” appears.  
•
Each time you change the Menu No.,  
a different scrolling message appears on the  
sub-display, describing the Menu No.  
5 Press [MENU] to exit Quick Menu mode.  
Note: If the Quick Menu has not been programmed, Press [Q-  
M.IN]/[Q-MR] or turning the MULTI/CH control in step 2 causes  
“CHECK” to be output in Morse code.  
4 Press [M.IN]/ [SCAN (SG.SEL)], or Mic [UP]/  
[DWN] to select a parameter.  
5 Press [MENU] to exit Menu mode.  
14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ꢉꢀꢀ0(18ꢀ6(783  
0(18ꢀ&21),*85$7,21  
Description  
Display*  
Settings**  
Default**  
Ref.  
Page  
Category  
No.  
Display brightness  
OFF/ 1 ~ 6  
00  
Off, 1: minimum, 6: maximum  
DISPLAY BRIGHTNESS  
53  
53  
4
1/ 2  
1
Display backlight color  
Operator  
Interface  
01  
02  
1: amber, 2: green  
BACKLIGHT COLOR  
Panel key response for double function  
1: 0.2 second, 2: 0.5 second, 3: 1 second  
1/ 2/ 3  
53  
PANEL KEY RESPONSE FOR DOUBLE  
FUNCTIONS  
2
Beep output level  
OFF/ 1 ~ 9 (1 step)  
03  
04  
05  
06  
07  
08  
52  
23, 35  
59  
OFF, 1: minimum, 9: maximum  
BEEP VOLUME  
4
Sidetone volume  
OFF/ 1 ~ 9 (1 step)  
Volume  
OFF, 1: minimum, 9: maximum  
SIDETONE VOLUME  
4
VGS-1 message playback volume  
OFF, 1: minimum, 9: maximum  
MESSAGE PLAYBACK VOLUME  
VGS-1 announcement volume  
OFF, 1: minimum, 7: maximum  
VOICE GUIDE VOLUME  
VGS-1 announcement speed  
0: slow, 4: fast  
OFF/ 1 ~ 9 (1 step)  
4
OFF/ 1~ 7 (1 step)  
62  
4
0 ~ 4 (1 step)  
1
62  
Voice Guide  
VOICE GUIDE SPEED  
VGS-1 announcement language  
EN: English, JP: Japanese  
VOICE GUIDE LANGUAGE  
VGS-1 auto announcement  
AUTO ANNOUNCEMENT  
MHz step  
EN/ JP  
61  
EN  
OFF/ ON  
09  
10  
60  
28  
ON  
0.1/ 0.5/ 1 [MHz]  
1
MHZ STEP  
Tuning control adjustment rate  
250/ 500/ 1000 [Hz]  
11  
12  
29  
28  
TUNING CONTROL CHANGE RATE PER  
1000  
OFF/ ON  
ON  
REVOLUTION  
Rounds off VFO frequencies changed by using the  
MULTI/CH control  
FREQUENCY ROUNDING OFF WHEN USING  
MULTI/CH CONTROL  
Tuning  
9 kHz frequency step size for the MULTI/CH  
control in AM mode on the AM broadcast band  
OFF/ ON  
13  
14  
28  
28  
MULTI/CH CONTROL 9KHZ STEP CHANGE IN  
K type: OFF  
E type: ON  
AM BROADCAST BAND  
Frequency step size for the MULTI/CH control in  
SSB/ CW/ FSK mode  
0.5/ 1/ 2.5/ 5/ 10 [kHz]  
5
MULTI/CH CONTROL  
15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ꢉꢀꢀ0(18ꢀ6(783  
Description  
Display*  
Settings**  
Default**  
Ref.  
Page  
Category  
No.  
Frequency step size for the MULTI/CH control in  
AM mode  
5/ 6.25/ 10/ 12.5/ 15/ 20/  
25/ 30/ 50/ 100 [kHz]  
15  
28  
28  
AM MULTI/CH CONTROL  
5
Tuning  
(continued)  
Frequency step size for the MULTI/CH control in  
FM mode  
5/ 6.25/ 10/ 12.5/ 15/ 20/  
25/ 30/ 50/ 100 [kHz]  
16  
FM MULTI/CH CONTROL  
10  
3/ 5/ 10 [ch]  
5
Number of quick memory channels  
NUMBER OF QUICK MEMORY CHANNELS  
Tunable memory recall frequencies  
TUNABLE MEMORY RECALL FREQUENCIES  
Program scan partially slowed  
17  
18  
19  
45  
42  
47  
Memory Channel  
OFF/ ON  
OFF  
OFF/ ON  
ON  
PROGRAM SCAN PARTIALLY SLOWED  
100/ 200/ 300/ 400/ 500  
[Hz]  
Slow down frequency range for the program scan  
20  
47  
PROGRAM SLOW-SCAN RANGE  
Program scan hold  
300  
OFF/ ON  
OFF  
Scan  
21  
22  
23  
24  
47  
48  
51  
39  
PROGRAM SCAN HOLD  
Scan resume method  
TO/ CO  
TO  
SCAN RESUME METHOD  
Auto mode operation  
ON/ OFF  
OFF  
Auto Mode  
AUTO MODE OPERATION  
Auto notch tracking speed  
AUTO NOTCH TRACKING SPEED  
0 ~ 4 (1 step)  
2
10/ 100/ 200/ 300/ 400/  
500 [Hz]  
TX filter for SSB/AM low cut  
25  
26  
27  
32  
32  
32  
TX FILTER FOR SSB/AM LOW CUT  
TX filter for SSB/AM high cut  
300  
2500/ 2600/ 2700/ 2800/  
2900/ 3000 [Hz]  
TX FILTER FOR SSB/AM HIGH CUT  
TX filter for SSB-DATA low cut  
TX FILTER FOR SSB-DATA LOW CUT  
TX filter for SSB-DATA high cut  
2700  
DSP Function  
10/ 100/ 200/ 300/ 400/  
500 [Hz]  
300  
2500/ 2600/ 2700/ 2800/  
2900/ 3000 [Hz]  
28  
29  
32  
31  
TX FILTER FOR SSB-DATA HIGH CUT  
Speech processor effect  
2700  
SOFT/ HARD  
HARD  
SPEECH PROCESSOR EFFECT  
DSP TX equalizer  
oFF: Off, Hb1: High boost1, Hb2: High boost2, FP:  
Formant pass, bb1: Bass boost1,  
OFF/ HB1/ HB2/ FP/ BB1/  
BB2/ C/ U  
30  
31  
32  
55  
bb2: Bass boost2, c: Conventional,  
U: User (Reserved for ARCP software)  
DSP TX EQUALIZER  
OFF  
Equalizer  
DSP RX equalizer  
oFF: Off, Hb1: High boost1, Hb2: High boost2, FP:  
Formant pass, bb1 Bass boost1,  
bb2: Bass boost2, FLAT: Flat  
U: User (Reserved for ARCP software)  
OFF/ HB1/ HB2/ FP/ BB1/  
BB2/ FLAT/ U  
DSP RX EQUALIZER  
OFF  
16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ꢉꢀꢀ0(18ꢀ6(783  
Description  
Display*  
Settings**  
Default**  
A/ B  
Ref.  
Category  
No.  
32  
33  
34  
35  
Page  
Electric keyer mode  
33  
34  
B
ELECTRIC KEYER MODE  
Keying priority over playback  
KEYING PRIORITY OVER PLAYBACK  
CW RX pitch/ TX sidetone frequency  
CW RX PITCH/TX SIDETONE FREQUENCY  
CW rise time  
OFF/ ON  
OFF  
300 ~ 1000 (50 [Hz] step)  
23  
33  
800  
1/ 2/ 4/ 6 [ms]  
6
CW RISE TIME  
AUTO/ 2.5 ~ 4.0  
(0.1 step)  
CW keying dot, dash weight ratio  
36  
33  
CW WEIGHTING  
AUTO  
OFF/ ON  
OFF  
Reverse CW keying auto weight ratio  
REVERSED CW WEIGHTING  
Bug key function  
37  
38  
39  
33  
34  
35  
OFF/ ON  
OFF  
CW  
BUG KEY FUNCTION  
Reversed dot and dash keying  
REVERSED DOT AND DASH KEYING  
MIC UP/DWN key paddle function  
PF: PF key PA: Paddle  
OFF/ ON  
OFF  
PF/ PA  
40  
36  
MIC UP/DWN KEY FUNCTION  
Auto CW TX when keying in SSB  
AUTO CW TX WHEN KEYING IN SSB  
Frequency correction for changing SSB to CW  
PF  
OFF/ ON  
OFF  
41  
42  
36  
36  
OFF/ ON  
FREQUENCY CORRECTION FOR SSB-TO-CW  
CHANGE  
OFF  
No Break-in operation while adjusting keying  
speed  
OFF/ ON  
43  
33  
OFF  
170/ 200/ 425/ 850 [Hz]  
170  
NO BK-IN WHILE ADJUSTING KEYING SPEED  
FSK shift  
44  
45  
46  
37  
37  
37  
FSK SHIFT  
FSK keying polarity  
OFF/ ON  
FSK  
FM  
OFF  
REVERSED FSK KEY-DOWN POLARITY  
FSK tone frequency  
1275/ 2125 [Hz]  
2125  
FSK TONE FREQUENCY  
MIC gain for FM  
1 ~ 3  
47 1: Low, 2: Mid, 3: Hi  
21  
FM MIC GAIN  
1
Fine transmission power tuning  
OFF/ ON  
OFF  
48  
56  
55  
55  
FINE TRANSMIT POWER CHANGE STEPS  
TX Control  
Transverter  
OFF/ 3/ 5/ 10/ 20/ 30  
(min)  
Time-out timer  
49  
TIME-OUT TIMER  
OFF  
OFF/ 1/ 2  
OFF  
Xverter/ power down of Xverter  
50  
XVERTER/ POWER DOWN OF XVERTER  
17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ꢉꢀꢀ0(18ꢀ6(783  
Description  
Display*  
Settings**  
Default**  
OFF/ ON  
OFF  
Ref.  
Category  
No.  
51  
52  
53  
54  
55  
56  
57  
Page  
TX hold when AT completes the tuning  
ANTENNA TUNER TX HOLD  
50  
50  
Antenna Tuner  
Linear Amp  
In-line AT while receiving  
OFF/ ON  
OFF  
ANTENNA TUNER FOR RECEPTION  
Linear amplifier control relay for HF band  
HF LINEAR AMPLIFIER CONTROL RELAY  
Linear amplifier control relay for 50 MHz band  
50MHZ LINEAR AMPLIFIER CONTROL RELAY  
Constant recording  
OFF/ 1/ 2/ 3  
OFF  
53  
OFF/ 1/ 2/ 3  
OFF  
53  
OFF/ ON  
ON  
60  
CONSTANT RECORDING  
Repeat the playback  
OFF/ ON  
OFF  
Message  
36, 59  
36, 59  
PLAYBACK REPEAT  
Interval time for repeating the playback  
PLAYBACK INTERVAL TIME  
0 ~ 60 [s] (1 step)  
10  
Split frequency transfer in master/ slave operation  
OFF/ ON  
58  
57  
TRANSFER SPLIT FREQUENCY DATA TO  
ANOTHER TRANSCEIVER  
OFF  
Split/ Transfer  
TX Inhibit  
Permit to write the transferred Split frequencies to  
the target VFOs  
OFF/ ON  
59  
60  
61  
57  
32  
COPY SPLIT FREQUENCY DATA TO VFO  
OFF  
OFF/ ON  
OFF  
TX inhibit  
TX INHIBIT  
4800/ 9600/ 19200/  
38400/ 57600/ 115200  
COM port communication speed  
COM PORT BAUDRATE  
57  
58  
9600 (bps)  
PC  
(Communication)  
4800/ 9600/ 19200/  
38400/ 57600/ 115200  
USB port communication speed  
62  
115200 (bps)  
ACC2/ USB  
USB PORT BAUDRATE  
Audio input line selection for data communications  
63  
64  
58  
58  
AUDIO INPUT LINE SELECT FOR DATA  
ACC2  
0 ~ 9 (1 step)  
4
COMMUNICATIONS  
Audio level of USB input for DATA communications  
AUDIO LEVEL OF USB INPUT FOR DATA  
COMMUNICATIONS  
Audio level of USB output for DATA  
communications  
0 ~ 9 (1 step)  
65  
66  
67  
68  
58  
58  
58  
58  
AUDIO LEVEL OF USB OUTPUT FOR DATA  
COMMUNICATIONS  
4
External Audio  
(Input/ Output)  
0 ~ 9 (1 step)  
4
Audio level of ACC2 input for data communications  
AUDIO LEVEL OF ACC2 INPUT FOR DATA  
COMMUNICATIONS  
AUDIO level of ACC2 output for data  
communications  
0 ~ 9 (1 step)  
AUDIO LEVEL OF ACC2 OUTPUT FOR DATA  
COMMUNICATIONS  
4
OFF/ ON  
OFF  
Mixing beep tones for ACC2/USB audio output  
MIXING BEEP TONES FOR ACC2/USB AUDIO  
OUTPUT  
18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ꢉꢀꢀ0(18ꢀ6(783  
Description  
Display*  
Settings**  
Default**  
OFF/ ON  
OFF  
Ref.  
Category  
No.  
69  
70  
71  
72  
73  
74  
75  
76  
Page  
Data VOX  
30  
VOX OPERATION WITH DATA INPUT  
Data VOX delay time  
0 ~ 100 (5 step)  
30  
31  
31  
63  
32  
58  
58  
50  
DATA VOX DELAY TIME  
Data VOX gain for the USB audio input  
USB VOX GAIN  
0 ~ 9 (1 step)  
4
0 ~ 9 (1 step)  
4
Data VOX gain for the ACC2 terminal  
ACC2 VOX GAIN  
PKS polarity  
OFF/ ON  
OFF  
External  
Accessory  
Control  
REVERSED PKS POLARITY  
Busy lockout (TX)  
OFF/ ON  
OFF  
BUSY FREQUENCY TRANSMISSION LOCKOUT  
CTCSS mute control  
1/ 2  
CTCSS MUTE CONTROL  
PSQ control signal logic  
1
LO/ OPEN  
LO  
PSQ LOGIC OUTPUT  
OFF/ BSY/ SQL/ SND/  
BSY-SND/ SQL-SND  
PSQ source output condition  
77  
58  
SQL  
PSQ SOURCE  
APO (Auto Power Off) function  
AUTO POWER OFF  
OFF/ 60/ 120/ 180 [min]  
OFF  
Timer  
78  
79  
50  
54  
0 ~ 87, 100 ~ 134,  
200 ~ 208, OFF  
Front panel PF A key assignment  
FRONT PANEL PF A KEY ASSIGNMENT  
Front panel PF B key assignment  
FRONT PANEL PF B KEY ASSIGNMENT  
Microphone PF 1 key assignment  
MIC PF 1 KEY ASSIGNMENT  
200 [VOICE1]  
0 ~ 87, 100 ~ 134,  
200 ~ 208, OFF  
80  
81  
82  
83  
84  
85  
54  
54  
54  
54  
54  
54  
201 [VOICE2]  
0 ~ 87, 100 ~ 134,  
200 ~ 208, OFF  
130 [A/B]  
0 ~ 87, 100 ~ 134,  
200 ~ 208, OFF  
Microphone PF 2 key assignment  
MIC PF 2 KEY ASSIGNMENT  
128 [SPLIT]  
PF Keys  
0 ~ 87, 100 ~ 134,  
200 ~ 208, OFF  
Microphone PF 3 key assignment  
MIC PF 3 KEY ASSIGNMENT  
132 [M>V]  
0 ~ 87, 100 ~ 134,  
200 ~ 208, OFF  
Microphone PF 4 key assignment  
MIC PF 4 KEY ASSIGNMENT  
203 [MONITOR]  
0 ~ 87, 100 ~ 134,  
200 ~ 208, OFF  
Microphone DWN key assignment  
MIC DOWN KEY ASSIGNMENT  
Microphone UP key assignment  
206 [DOWN]  
0 ~ 87, 100 ~ 134,  
200 ~ 208, OFF  
86  
87  
54  
23  
MIC UP KEY ASSIGNMENT  
Power on message  
207 [UP]  
HELLO/ EDIT  
KENWOOD  
Message  
POWER ON MESSAGE  
*
The bolded lettering of the display message is what appears on the display while paused.  
** Settings and default values may be modified.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
19  
ꢉꢀꢀ0(18ꢀ6(783  
&+$5$&7(5ꢀ(175<  
When character entry is required, a cursor will appear  
on the display.  
1 Move the cursor to the left or right by pressing [Q-  
M.IN] or [Q-MR].  
2 Turn the MULTI/CH control or press [M.IN]/  
[SCAN (SG.SEL)] to select your desired character.  
•
You can delete the selected character by  
pressing [CL].  
3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 to enter the remaining  
characters.  
4 Press [MENU] to set the entry and to exit character  
entry mode.  
•
Press [CLR] at any time to cancel character  
entry mode and return to the Menu selection.  
Available alphanumeric characters:  
A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q(q) R S T U V W X  
Y Z (space) + – / 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9  
Note: Refer to page 23 to change the Power On message, and  
page 43 to register a Memory Channel name.  
20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
%$6,&ꢀ&20081,&$7,216  
66%ꢀ75$160,66,21  
)0ꢀ75$160,66,21  
SSB is the most commonly-used mode on the HF  
Amateur radio bands. Compared with other voice  
modes, SSB requires only a narrow bandwidth for  
communications. SSB also allows long distance  
communications with minimum transmission power.  
FM is a common mode for communicating on VHF or  
UHF frequencies. As for HF and the 6 m band,  
29 MHz and 51-54 MHz bands are commonly used  
for FM operation. You can also utilize 10 m/ 6 m band  
repeaters to reach your friends when they are outside  
or skipped over from your coverage. Although FM  
requires a wider bandwidth when compared to SSB  
or AM mode, it has the finest audio quality among  
these modes. When combined with the full-quieting  
aspect of FM signals, which suppresses background  
noise on the frequency, FM can be the best method  
for maintaining casual communications with your local  
friends.  
If necessary, refer to “OPERATING BASICS”,  
beginning on page 10, for details on how to receive.  
1 Select an operating frequency.  
2 Press [LSB/USB] until “USB” or “LSB” appears on  
the operating mode display.  
•
If the desired sideband (“USB” or “LSB”) does  
not appear, select the other sideband first.  
Then, press [LSB/USB]. The mode indicator  
changes to your desired sideband.  
If necessary, refer to “OPERATING BASICS”,  
beginning on page 10, for details on how to receive.  
1 Select an operating frequency.  
•
“USB” represents the upper sideband and  
“LSB” represents the lower sideband. Normally,  
USB is used for the communications for  
10 MHz and above while LSB is used for the  
frequencies below 10 MHz.  
2 Press [FM/AM (FM-N)] until “FM” appears.  
•
If “FM” does not appear, select “AM”, then press  
[FM/AM (FM-N)]. The mode indicator changes  
to “FM”.  
3 Press [MIC (CAR)] to adjust the Microphone gain.  
3 Press and hold Mic [PTT].  
•
The current gain level appears on the sub-  
display.  
•
•
The TX-RX LED lights red.  
Refer to “VOX” {page 30} for information on  
automatic TX/ RX switching.  
4 Speak into the microphone in your normal voice.  
•
Speaking too close to the microphone or too  
loudly may increase distortion and reduce  
intelligibility at the receiving end.  
4 Press and hold Mic [PTT].  
•
•
The TX-RX LED lights red.  
Refer to “VOX” {page 30} for information on  
automatic TX/ RX switching.  
•
You can switch the Microphone gain for FM  
between 1 (Normal), 2 (Medium), and 3 (High)  
by using Menu No. 47. 1 (Normal) is usually  
appropriate; however, select 3 (High) if other  
stations report that your modulation is weak.  
5 Speak into the microphone and turn the  
MULTI/CH control so that the ALC meter reflects  
your voice level but does not exceed the ALC limit.  
•
Speak in your normal tone and level of voice.  
Speaking too close to the microphone or too  
loudly may increase distortion and reduce  
intelligibility at the receiving end.  
5 Release Mic [PTT] to return to Reception mode.  
•
The TX-RX LED lights green or turns off,  
depending on the SQL control position.  
Refer to “COMMUNICATING AIDS”, beginning on  
page 28, for additional information on useful operation  
functions.  
Note: Microphone gain adjustment for SSB or AM has no  
effect in FM mode. In FM mode, you must select 1 (Normal), 2  
(Medium), or 3 (High) in Menu No. 47.  
•
You may want to use the Speech Processor.  
Refer to “SPEECH PROCESSOR” {page 31}  
for details.  
6 Release Mic [PTT] to return to Reception mode.  
•
The TX-RX LED lights green or turns off,  
depending on the SQL control position.  
7 Press [MIC (CAR)] or [CLR] to exit the Microphone  
gain adjustment.  
Refer to “COMMUNICATING AIDS”, beginning on  
page 28, for information on additional useful operation  
functions.  
21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ꢊꢀꢀ%$6,&ꢀ&20081,&$7,216  
$0ꢀ75$160,66,21  
1$552:ꢀ%$1':,'7+ꢀ)25ꢀ)0  
Each mode used on the HF Amateur bands has its  
own advantages. Although long distance DX contacts  
may be less common while using AM, the superior  
audio quality characteristic of AM operation is one  
reason why some hams prefer this mode.  
Select wide band or narrow band TX deviation  
depending on whether the other station is using wide  
band or narrow band filter for FM mode. While “NAR”  
appears, the TS-590S transceiver transmits signals in  
narrow band FM but the reception IF filter bandwidth  
remains unchanged (Wide). The deviation selection  
is crucial to avoid audio distortion or insufficient  
intelligibility that the other station will encounter.  
If necessary, refer to “OPERATING BASICS”,  
beginning on page 10, for details on how to receive.  
1 Select an operating frequency.  
1 Press [FM/AM (FM-N)] until “FM” appears.  
2 Press [FM/AM (FM-N)] until “AM” appears.  
•
If “FM” does not appear, select “AM” first, then  
press [FM/AM (FM-N)]. The mode indicator  
changes to “FM”.  
•
If “AM” does not appear, select “FM” first, then  
press [FM/AM (FM-N)]. The mode indicator  
changes to “AM”.  
2 Press and hold [FM/AM (FM-N)] to toggle the  
selection between wide and narrow TX deviation.  
•
“
” appears when narrow TX deviation is  
selected.  
3 Press [MIC (CAR)] to enter the Microphone gain  
adjustment mode.  
•
The current gain level appears on the sub-  
display.  
4 Press and hold Mic [PTT].  
&:ꢀ75$160,66,21  
•
•
The TX-RX LED lights red.  
CW operators know that this mode is very reliable  
when communicating under worst conditions. It may  
be true that newer digital modes rival CW as being  
equally as useful in poor conditions. These modes,  
however, do not have the long history of service nor  
the simplicity that CW provides.  
Refer to “VOX” {page 30} for information on  
automatic TX/ RX switching.  
5 Speak into the microphone and adjust the  
MULTI/CH control so that the power meter slightly  
reflects your voice level.  
•
Speak in your normal tone and level of voice.  
Speaking too close to the microphone or too  
loudly may increase distortion and reduce  
intelligibility at the receiving end.  
This transceiver has a built-in electronic keyer that  
supports a variety of functions. For details on using  
these functions, refer to “ELECTRONIC KEYER”  
{page 33}.  
•
You may want to use the Speech Processor.  
Refer to “SPEECH PROCESSOR” {page 31}  
for details.  
If necessary, refer to “OPERATING BASICS”,  
beginning on page 10, for details on how to receive.  
1 Select the operating frequency.  
6 Release Mic [PTT] to return to Reception mode.  
2 Press [CW/FSK (REV)] until “CW” appears.  
•
The TX-RX LED lights green or turns off,  
depending on the SQL control position.  
•
If “CW” does not appear, select “FSK” first, then  
press [CW/FSK (REV)]. The mode indicator  
changes to “CW”.  
7 Press [MIC (CAR)] or [CLR] to exit the Microphone  
gain adjustment mode.  
•
To precisely tune in another station, use Auto  
Zero-beat. Refer to “AUTO ZERO-BEAT”  
{page 23}.  
Refer to “COMMUNICATING AIDS”, beginning on  
page 28, for information on additional useful operation  
functions.  
Note: When the TX power meter reading exceeds the value that  
you specified in the TX Power setting {page 56}, decrease the  
microphone gain or adjust your tone and level of voice.  
3 Press [SEND].  
•
The TX-RX LED lights red.  
4 Operate the Keys or Paddle.  
•
As you transmit, you should hear a sidetone  
that lets you monitor your own transmission.  
5 Press [SEND] to return to Reception mode.  
•
The TX-RX LED lights green or turns off,  
depending on the SQL control setting.  
22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ꢊꢀꢀ%$6,&ꢀ&20081,&$7,216  
$872ꢀ=(52ꢈ%($7  
&$55,(5ꢀ/(9(/  
Use Auto Zero-beat before transmitting to tune in a  
CW station. Auto Zero-beat automatically and exactly  
matches your transmit frequency with the station you  
are receiving. Neglecting to do this will reduce your  
chances of being heard by the other station.  
When using AM, CW, or FSK mode, you can adjust  
the carrier level.  
1 Press and hold [MIC (CAR].  
•
The current gain level appears on the sub  
display.  
1 Tune to the CW signal using the Tuning control.  
2 Press [CW T. (AGC OFF)] to start Auto Zero-beat  
while CW is selected for the operating mode.  
•
“CW TUNE” appears.  
2 Turn the MULTI/CH control so that the ALC meter  
reads within the limits of the ALC zone.  
•
For AM mode, adjust the MULTI/CH control so  
that the ALC meter just begins to indicate.  
•
Your reception frequency automatically  
changes so that the pitch (tone) of the received  
signal exactly matches the TX sidetone/ RX  
pitch frequency that you have selected. Refer  
to “TX SIDETONE/ RX PITCH FREQUENCY”  
{below}.  
3 Press and hold [MIC (CAR] again or press [CLR]  
to complete the setting.  
32:(5ꢀ21ꢀ0(66$*(  
Each time you switch the transceiver ON,  
•
•
When matching is completed, “CW TUNE”  
disappears.  
“KENWOOD” (default) appears on the sub display  
for approximately 2 seconds. You can program your  
favorite message in place of the default message.  
You can enter a message using up to 8 characters.  
If matching is unsuccessful, the previous  
frequency is restored.  
3 To quit Auto Zero-beat, press [CW T. (AGC OFF)]  
or [CLR].  
Note:  
1 Press [MENU], then press [Q-M.IN]/ [Q-MR] or  
turn the MULTI/CH control to access Menu No 87.  
2 Press [M.IN]/ [SCAN (SG.SEL)] to begin editing  
X
X
X
When using Auto Zero-beat, the matching error is normally  
within 5 Hz.  
Auto Zero-beat may fail if the keying speed of the target  
station is too slow or if some interference is present.  
When the RIT function is ON, only RIT frequencies change  
to make the Auto Zero-beat adjustment.  
the message.  
3 Move the cursor to the left or right by pressing [Q-  
M.IN] or [Q-MR].  
7;ꢀ6,'(721(ꢆꢀ5;ꢀ3,7&+ꢀ)5(48(1&<  
As you send CW, you will hear tones from  
4 Press [M.IN]/ [SCAN (SG.SEL] or turn the MULTI/  
the transceiver speaker. These are called TX  
(transmission) sidetones. Listening to these tones,  
you can monitor what you are transmitting. You may  
also use the tones to ensure that your key contacts  
are closing, the keyer is functioning, or to practice  
sending without actually putting a signal on the air.  
CH control to select your desired character.  
•
You can delete the selected character by  
pressing [CL].  
5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 to enter the remaining  
characters.  
RX (reception) pitch refers to the frequency of CW  
that you hear after tuning in a CW station.  
6 Press [MENU] to set the entry and exit character  
entry mode.  
•
Press [CLR] at any time to cancel character  
entry mode and return to the Menu selection.  
On this transceiver, the frequency of the sidetone and  
RX pitch are equal and selectable. Access Menu No.  
34 to select the frequency that is most comfortable for  
you. The selectable range is from 300 Hz to 1000 Hz  
in steps of 50 Hz (default is 800 Hz).  
To change the volume of the TX sidetone, access  
Menu No. 4. The selections range from 1 to 9 and  
OFF (default is 5).  
Note:  
X
X
The position of the AF control does not affect the volume of  
the TX sidetone.  
When changing the CW pitch/ side tone, the shift amount  
of the receive filter is automatically applied to the CW pitch/  
side tone. (In Quick Memory mode, the CW pitch/ side tone  
is not revised since the receive filter information stored in the  
Quick Memory has priority.)  
23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(1+$1&('ꢀ&20081,&$7,216  
7)ꢈ6(7ꢀꢂ75$160,66,21ꢀ)5(48(1&<ꢀ6(7ꢃ  
63/,7ꢈ)5(48(1&<ꢀ23(5$7,21  
TF-SET allows you to temporarily switch your  
transmission frequency and reception frequency.  
Canceling this function immediately restores the  
original transmission and reception frequencies.  
By activating TF-SET, you can listen on your transmit  
frequency, and change it while listening. This allows  
you to check whether or not the newly selected  
transmission frequency is free of interference.  
Usually you can communicate with other stations  
using a single frequency for receiving and  
transmitting. In this case, you select only one  
frequency on either VFO A or VFO B. However, there  
are cases where you must select one frequency for  
receiving and a different frequency for transmitting.  
This requires the use of 2 VFOs. This is referred to  
as “split-frequency operation”. One typical case which  
requires this type of operation is when you use an FM  
repeater {page 25}. Another typical case is when you  
call a rare DX station.  
1 Configure split-frequency operation as explained in  
the previous section.  
2 Press and hold [TF-SET], then turn the Tuning  
control or press Mic [UP]/ [DWN] to change the  
transmission frequency.  
When a rare or desirable DX station is heard, that  
operator may immediately get many simultaneous  
responses. Often, such a station is lost under the noise  
and confusion of many calling stations. If you find that  
you are suddenly being called by many operators, it  
is your responsibility to control the situation. You may  
announce that you will be “listening up 5 (kHz, from  
your present transmission frequency)”, or “listening  
down between 5 and 10 (kHz)”.  
•
The transceiver receives on the frequency as  
you change, but the frequency shown on the  
sub-display (the original reception frequency)  
stays unchanged.  
1 Press [A/B (A=B)] to select VFO A or VFO B.  
•
“
” or “  
” appears to show which VFO is  
3 Release [TF-SET].  
You are now receiving again on your original  
reception frequency.  
selected.  
•
2 Select an operating frequency.  
•
•
This frequency will be used for transmission.  
Successfully contacting a DX station in a pileup  
often depends on making a well-timed call on a clear  
frequency. That is, it is important to select a relatively  
clear transmission frequency and to transmit at the  
exact instant when the DX station is listening but the  
majority of the groups aren’t transmitting. Switch  
your reception and transmission frequencies by using  
the TF-SET function and listen to your transmission  
frequency. You will soon learn the rhythm of the  
DX station and the pileup. The more proficient you  
become at using this function, the more DX stations  
you will contact.  
To copy the selected VFO frequency to the  
other VFO, press and hold [A/B (A=B)].  
3 Press [A/B (A=B)] to select the other VFO.  
4 Select an operating frequency.  
•
This frequency will be used for reception.  
5 Press [SPLIT].  
•
•
“
” appears.  
Each time you press [A/B (A=B)], the reception  
and transmission frequencies are swapped.  
Note:  
X
TF-SET is disabled while transmitting.  
X
You can change the transmission frequency even when the  
Frequency lock function is ON.  
X
An RIT offset frequency is not added; however, an XIT offset  
frequency is added to the transmit frequency during TF-SET.  
6 To quit split-frequency operation, press [SPLIT]  
again.  
•
“
” disappears.  
24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ꢋꢀꢀ(1+$1&('ꢀ&20081,&$7,216  
6 Press [AGC/T (SEL] to turn the Tone function ON  
)0ꢀ5(3($7(5ꢀ23(5$7,21  
if the repeater requires a subtone.  
Most Amateur radio voice repeaters use a separate  
reception and transmission frequency. The  
transmission frequency may be higher or lower than  
the reception frequency. In addition, some repeaters  
may require the transceiver to transmit a subtone  
before the repeater can be used.  
•
•
“ ” appears.  
Refer to “Selecting a Tone Frequency” for more  
details on the subtone {page 26}.  
Compared to simplex communication, you can  
usually transmit over much greater distances by  
using a repeater. Repeaters are typically located  
on a mountain top or other elevated location. Often  
they operate at higher ERP (Effective Radiated  
Power) than a typical station. This combination of  
elevation and high ERP allows communications over  
considerable distances.  
•
To quit the Subtone function, press [AGC/T (SEL)]  
twice.  
7 Press [SPLIT].  
” appears.  
•
“
8 Press [A/B (A=B)] to return to the original  
reception frequency.  
HF/ 6 m band repeaters usually operate in the  
29 MHz FM sub-band and 51-54 MHz band. This  
special service combines the advantages of FM  
operation, good fidelity with noise and interference  
immunity, with the excitement of HF DX (long  
distance) communications. Even on a quiet day,  
10 m FM provides reliable around-town  
communications with the potential for sudden DX from  
across the country or around the world.  
Note:  
9 Press Mic [PTT] to transmit.  
•
•
The VFO changes to the other VFO to transmit.  
Each time you press [A/B (A=B)], the reception  
and transmission frequencies are swapped.  
10 Press [SPLIT] to quit split-frequency operation.  
” disappears.  
X
When programming 2 separate frequencies using 2 VFOs,  
be sure to select FM mode on both VFOs.  
•
“
X
When operating through a repeater, over deviation caused  
by speaking too loudly into the microphone can cause your  
signal to “talk-off” (break up) through the repeater.  
The data that you select in steps 1 to 8 can be stored  
in memory. Refer to “Split-Frequency Channels”  
{page 41}.  
Note:  
X
29.520 MHz  
When operating through a repeater, over deviation caused  
by speaking too loudly into the microphone can cause your  
signal to “talk-off” (break up) through the repeater.  
88.5 Hz  
29.620 MHz  
X
To check the tone frequency stored in a memory channel,  
recall the desired memory channel and press [AGC/T  
(SEL)].  
29.620 MHz  
29.520 MHz  
88.5 Hz  
75$160,77,1*ꢀ$ꢀ721(  
In general, FM repeaters require the transceiver to  
transmit a sub-audible tone to prevent other repeaters  
on the same frequency from locking each other up.  
The required tone frequency differs among repeaters.  
Repeaters also differ in their requirements for either  
continuous or burst tones. For the appropriate  
selections for your accessible repeaters, consult your  
local repeater reference.  
1 Press [A/B (A=B)] to select VFO A or VFO B.  
” or “ ” appears to show which VFO is  
selected.  
After completing the tone settings, pressing and  
holding Mic [PTT] causes the transceiver to transmit  
the selected tone. If you have selected a 1750 Hz  
tone, the transceiver sends a 500 ms tone burst each  
time transmission starts.  
Note: If you store tone settings in a memory channel, you need  
not reprogram each time. Refer to “MEMORY FEATURES”  
{page 41}.  
•
“
2 Turn the Tuning control or the MULTI/CH control  
to select the reception frequency.  
3 Press [FM/AM (FM-N)] to select FM mode.  
4 Press and hold [A/B (A=B)] to duplicate the  
frequencies and other data to the other VFO.  
5 Turn the Tuning control or the MULTI/CH control  
to select the transmission frequency.  
25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ꢋꢀꢀ(1+$1&('ꢀ&20081,&$7,216  
Qꢀ $FWLYDWLQJꢀWKHꢀ7RQHꢀ)XQFWLRQ  
721(ꢀ)5(48(1&<ꢀ,'ꢀ6&$1  
1 Confirm that FM mode has been selected on  
This function scans through all tone frequencies to  
identify the incoming tone frequency on a received  
signal. You may find this useful when you do not  
know the tone frequency that the repeater uses.  
the VFO(s) {page 10}.  
•
When using 2 VFOs, you must select FM  
mode on both VFOs.  
1 While the Tone function is ON (“ ” is visible), press  
2 Press [AGC/T (SEL)].  
“ ” appears.  
and hold [AGC/T (SEL)].  
•
•
The current tone frequency appears.  
2 Press [SCAN (SG.SEL)] to activate the Tone  
frequency ID scan.  
•
While the transceiver is receiving a signal, “ ”  
blinks and every tone frequency is scanned.  
When the tone frequency is identified, the  
transceiver stops scanning and the identified  
frequency is displayed.  
Note: You cannot use the Tone function with the CTCSS  
function.  
Qꢀ 6HOHFWLQJꢀDꢀ7RQHꢀ)UHTXHQF\  
1 While “ ” appears (Tone function is ON), press  
and hold [AGC/T (SEL)].  
•
The current tone frequency appears.  
The default is 88.5 Hz.  
•
•
Press [SCAN (SG.SEL)] or [CLR] to stop  
scanning while the tone frequency ID scan is  
active.  
Press [SCAN (SG.SEL)] again to resume  
scanning.  
2 Turn the MULTI/CH control to select the desired  
tone frequency.  
Note: Received signals are audible while scanning is in  
progress.  
•
The available tone frequencies are listed in  
the table below.  
3 Press and hold [AGC/T (SEL)] or press [CLR]  
)0ꢀ&7&66ꢀ23(5$7,21  
to complete the setting.  
You may sometimes want to hear calls only from  
specific persons. When using FM mode, the  
Continuous Tone Coded Squelch System (CTCSS)  
allows you to ignore (not hear) unwanted calls from  
other persons who are using the same frequency.  
A CTCSS tone is sub-audible and is selectable from  
among the 42 tone frequencies. Select the same  
CTCSS tone as the other stations in your group. You  
will not hear calls from stations other than those using  
the same CTCSS tone.  
Freq.  
(Hz)  
Freq.  
(Hz)  
Freq.  
(Hz)  
Freq.  
(Hz)  
No.  
No.  
No.  
No.  
00  
01  
02  
03  
04  
05  
06  
07  
08  
09  
10  
67.0 11  
97.4 22 141.3 33 206.5  
69.3 12 100.0 23 146.2 34 210.7  
71.9 13 103.5 24 151.4 35 218.1  
74.4 14 107.2 25 156.7 36 225.7  
77.0 15 110.9 26 162.2 37 229.1  
79.7 16 114.8 27 167.9 38 233.6  
82.5 17 118.8 28 173.8 39 241.8  
85.4 18 123.0 29 179.9 40 250.3  
88.5 19 127.3 30 186.2 41 254.1  
91.5 20 131.8 31 192.8 42 1750  
Note: CTCSS does not cause your conversation to be private.  
It only relieves you from listening to unwanted conversations.  
1 Press [A/B (A=B)] to select VFO A or VFO B.  
•
“
” or “  
” appears to show which VFO is  
selected.  
2 Select the 29 MHz band or the 51-54 MHz band  
94.8 21 136.5 32 203.5 --  
--  
using [28 (9)] or [50 (0)].  
3 Select the desired frequency with the Tuning  
Note:  
control or MULTI/CH control.  
X
You can select a tone frequency independent of a  
CTCSS frequency.  
4 Press [FM/AM (FM-N)] to select FM mode.  
5 Turn the SQL control to adjust the squelch.  
6 Press [AGC/T (SEL)] until “ ” appears.  
X
When 1750 Hz is selected, the transceiver sends a  
500 ms tone burst each time transmission starts. You  
cannot transmit 1750 Hz tone manually.  
7 While “ ” is visible, press and hold [AGC/T  
(SEL)].  
•
The current CTCSS frequency appears (default  
is 88.5 Hz).  
26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ꢋꢀꢀ(1+$1&('ꢀ&20081,&$7,216  
•
•
Press [SCAN (SG.SEL)] or [CLR] to stop  
scanning while the CTCSS frequency ID scan is  
active.  
Press [SCAN (SG.SEL)] again to resume  
scanning.  
8 Turn the MULTI/CH control to select the  
appropriate CTCSS frequency.  
Note: Received signals are audible while scanning is in  
progress.  
•
The selectable CTCSS frequencies are listed in  
the table below.  
9 Press and hold [AGC/T (SEL)] or press [CLR] to  
&5266ꢀ721(  
complete the setting.  
Use this feature when using different uplink and  
downlink tones to access a repeater. You can set a  
transmission Tone frequency and reception CTCSS  
frequency to different frequencies.  
Freq.  
(Hz)  
Freq.  
(Hz)  
Freq.  
(Hz)  
Freq.  
(Hz)  
No.  
No.  
No.  
No.  
00  
01  
02  
03  
04  
05  
06  
07  
08  
09  
10  
67.0 11  
97.4 22 141.3 33 206.5  
69.3 12 100.0 23 146.2 34 210.7  
71.9 13 103.5 24 151.4 35 218.1  
74.4 14 107.2 25 156.7 36 225.7  
77.0 15 110.9 26 162.2 37 229.1  
79.7 16 114.8 27 167.9 38 233.6  
82.5 17 118.8 28 173.8 39 241.8  
85.4 18 123.0 29 179.9 40 250.3  
88.5 19 127.3 30 186.2 41 254.1  
To set the transmission tone:  
1 Press [A/B (A=B)] to select VFO A or VFO B.  
2 Select your desired transmission frequency.  
3 Press [FM/AM (FM-N)] to select FM.  
4 Press [AGC/T (SEL)] until “ ” appears.  
5 Press and hold [AGC/T (SEL)], then rotate the  
MULTI/CH control to select your desired Tone  
frequency.  
91.5 20 131.8 31 192.8 --  
94.8 21 136.5 32 203.5 --  
--  
--  
6 Press and hold [AGC/T (SEL)] or press [CLR] to  
complete the setting.  
You will hear calls only when the selected tone is  
received. To answer the call, press and hold Mic  
[PTT], then speak into the microphone.  
To set the reception tone:  
1 Press [A/B (A=B)] to select the other VFO.  
2 Select your desired reception frequency.  
3 Press [FM/AM (FM-N)] to select FM.  
4 Press [AGC/T (SEL)] until “ ” appears.  
Skip steps 7 and 8 if you have already programmed  
the appropriate CTCSS frequency.  
Note:  
X
X
X
When using split-frequency operation, select FM mode on  
both VFOs to use CTCSS.  
You can select a CTCSS frequency independent of a tone  
frequency.  
5 Press and hold [AGC/T (SEL)], then rotate the  
MULTI/CH control to select your desired CTCSS  
frequency.  
You cannot use the CTCSS function with the Tone function.  
6 Press and hold [AGC/T (SEL)] or press [CLR] to  
complete the setting.  
&7&66ꢀ)5(48(1&<ꢀ,'ꢀ6&$1  
To set the Cross tone:  
This function scans through all CTCSS frequencies to  
identify the incoming CTCSS frequency on a received  
signal. You may find this useful when you cannot  
recall the CTCSS frequency that the other persons in  
your group are using.  
1 Press [SPLIT].  
•
“SPLIT” appears on the display.  
2 Press [AGC/T (SEL)] until “ ” appears.  
Note: hen the cross tone function is ON, the Tone and CTCSS  
frequency cannot be changed. To change the Tone or CTCSS  
frequency, press [AGC/T (SEL)] to turn Tone or CTCSS ON,  
then change the setting.  
1 While the CTCSS function is ON, press and hold  
[AGC/T (SEL)].  
•
The current CTCSS frequency appears.  
2 Press [SCAN (SG.SEL)] to activate the CTCSS  
frequency ID scan.  
•
While the transceiver is receiving a signal, “  
”
blinks and every CTCSS frequency is scanned.  
When the CTCSS frequency is identified, the  
transceiver stops scanning and the identified  
frequency is displayed.  
27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
&20081,&$7,1*ꢀ$,'6  
Note: When entering a frequency using the numeric  
keys, if you turn the MULTI/CH control in the middle of the  
frequency entry, the frequency will be entered into the log.  
5(&(37,21  
6(/(&7,1*ꢀ<285ꢀ)5(48(1&<  
Qꢀ 8VLQJꢀWKHꢀ0+]ꢀNH\  
In addition to turning the Tuning control or pressing  
Mic [UP]/ [DWN], there are several other ways  
to select your frequency. This section describes  
additional methods of frequency selection that may  
save you time and effort.  
You can use the MULTI/CH control to change the  
operating frequency in steps of 1 MHz.  
1 Press [MHz].  
•
“
” appears.  
Qꢀ 'LUHFWꢀ)UHTXHQF\ꢀ(QWU\  
When the desired frequency is far removed from  
the current frequency, directly entering a frequency  
from the numeric keypad is usually the fastest  
method.  
2 Turn the MULTI/CH control.  
•
Clockwise increases the frequency and  
counter-clockwise decreases the frequency.  
1 Press [ENT].  
•
“ - - . - - - . - - ” appears.  
3 Press [MHz] again to exit.  
” disappears.  
•
“
If you prefer to change the frequency in steps of  
100 kHz or 500 kHz, rather than 1 MHz, access  
Menu No. 10 and select 100 kHz, 500 kHz, or  
1 MHz.  
2 Press the numeric keys ([50 (0)] to [28 (9)]) to  
enter your desired frequency.  
•
Pressing [ENT] at any time fills the  
remaining digits (the digits you did not enter)  
with 0 and completes the entry.  
Note: Even if 100 kHz or 500 kHz is assigned for the [MHz]  
key, “  
” appears on the display.  
To select 1.85 MHz for example, press  
[ENT], [50 (0)], [1.8 (1)], [24 (8)], [14 (5)],  
then press [ENT] to complete the input (6  
key strokes).  
Qꢀ 4XLFNꢀ46<  
To move up or down the frequency quickly, use the  
MULTI/CH control. Turning this control changes  
the operating frequency in steps of 5 kHz for SSB/  
CW/ FSK/ AM and steps of 10 kHz for FM.  
•
Pressing [CLR] before pressing [ENT]  
cancels the entry and restores the current  
VFO frequency.  
•
If you want to change the default frequency  
step size, access Menu No. 14 (SSB/CW/FSK),  
15 (AM), or 16 (FM). Press [M.IN]/ [SCAN (SG.  
SEL)] to select 500 Hz, 1 kHz, 2.5 kHz, 5 kHz,  
or 10 kHz for SSB/ CW/ FSK, and 5 kHz, 6.25  
kHz, 10 kHz, 12.5 kHz, 15 kHz, 20 kHz, 25 kHz,  
30 kHz, 50 kHz, or 100 kHz for AM/ FM. The  
default frequency step size is 5 kHz for SSB/  
CW/ FSK/ AM and 10 kHz for FM.  
Note:  
X
X
X
You can enter a frequency in the range of 30.00 kHz  
to 59.999.99 MHz. Refer to the specifications for the  
available frequency range.  
Attempting to enter a frequency that is outside the  
selectable frequency range causes an alarm to sound  
and the entered frequency is rejected.  
When the entered frequency does not meet the current  
VFO frequency step size requirement, the nearest  
available frequency is automatically selected after the  
entered frequency is changed.  
When the 10 Hz digit (last displayed digit) is entered,  
the digit 0 is automatically entered for the 1 Hz digit,  
and frequency entry is completed. The 1 Hz digit is not  
displayed.  
•
•
When changing the operating frequency by  
using the MULTI/CH control, frequencies  
are rounded such that new frequencies are  
multiples of the frequency step size. To disable  
this function, access Menu No. 12 and select  
“oFF” (default is ON).  
X
X
When an entered frequency is accepted, RIT or XIT will  
be switched OFF, but the RIT or XIT offset frequency is  
not cleared.  
Within the AM broadcast band, the step size  
automatically defaults to the frequency step  
value in Menu No. 13. This frequency step size  
can be switched between 9 kHz (“on”) and  
5 kHz (“oFF”) via Menu No. 13.  
Qꢀ )UHTXHQF\ꢀ(QWU\ꢀ+LVWRU\  
The last 10 frequencies you entered are stored in  
the Frequency Entry History. You can access the  
history to easily re-enter a recently used frequency.  
Note: The programmed frequency step size for the  
MULTI/CH control is stored independently for the HF and  
50 MHz bands. You can also set a different frequency step  
size for SSB/ CW/ FSK, AM and FM modes.  
1 Press [ENT].  
2 Turn the MULTI/CH control.  
•
The entered frequency along with its log  
number appears. The most recent entered  
frequency is logged as number E0 and the  
oldest frequency is logged as number E9.  
3 Press [ENT] to set the selected frequency to  
the VFO.  
28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ꢌꢀꢀ&20081,&$7,1*ꢀ$,'6  
5,7ꢀꢂ5(&(,9(ꢀ,1&5(0(17$/ꢀ781,1*ꢃ  
Qꢀ )LQHꢀ7XQLQJ  
The default frequency step size when turning the  
Tuning control to change the frequency is 10  
Hz for SSB/ CW/ FSK, and 100 Hz for AM/ FM.  
However, you can change the frequency step size  
to 1 Hz for SSB/ CW/ FSK, and 10 Hz for AM/ FM.  
RIT provides the ability to change your reception  
frequency by 9.99 kHz in steps of 10 Hz without  
changing your transmission frequency. If the Fine  
Tuning ([FINE (F.LOCK)]) function is ON, the  
frequency step size becomes 1 Hz ( 9.999 kHz). RIT  
works equally well with all modulation modes and  
while using VFO or Memory Recall mode.  
1 Press [FINE (F.LOCK)].  
•
“
” appears.  
1 Press [RIT].  
•
“
” and the RIT offset appear.  
2 Turn the Tuning control to select the exact  
frequency.  
2 If required, press [CL] to reset the RIT offset to 0.  
3 To quit the function, press [FINE (F.LOCK)]  
again.  
3 Turn the RIT/ XIT control to change your reception  
frequency.  
•
“
” disappears.  
4 To turn RIT OFF, press [RIT].  
Qꢀ 7XQLQJꢀ&RQWUROꢀ$GMXVWPHQWꢀ5DWH  
•
The reception frequency is returned to the  
frequency that was selected prior to step 1.  
The default Tuning control adjustment rate is 500.  
This represents the number of pulses the Tuning  
control generates in a complete revolution. Each  
pulse changes the tuning frequency based on the  
current frequency step size (the frequency step  
size for the Tuning control is 10 Hz for SSB/ CW/  
FSK and 100 Hz for AM/ FM). For example, in  
SSB mode the frequency step size is 10 Hz, so the  
frequency would change by 5,000 Hz in a complete  
revolution of the Tuning control. The adjustment  
rate of the Tuning control can be lowered to 250  
pulses per revolution or increased to 1000 pulses  
per revolution.  
Note: When storing the frequency in a Memory channel with  
the RIT function ON, the RIT offset frequency is added to or  
subtracted from the VFO frequency. The calculated data is then  
stored in the Memory channel.  
$*&ꢀꢂ$8720$7,&ꢀ*$,1ꢀ&21752/ꢃ  
When using a mode other than FM, AGC selects the  
time constant for the Automatic Gain Control circuit.  
Selecting a slow time constant will cause the receiver  
gain and S-meter readings to react slowly to large  
input changes. A fast time constant causes the  
receiver gain and the S-meter to react quickly to  
changes in the input signal. A fast AGC setting is  
particularly useful in the following situations:  
1 Press [MENU], then press [Q-M.IN]/ [Q-MR] or  
turn the MULTI/CH control to select Menu No.  
11.  
•
•
•
Tuning rapidly  
2 Press [M.IN]/ [SCAN (SG.SEL)] to select “250”,  
Receiving weak signals  
Receiving high-speed CW  
“500”, or “1000” (default).  
3 Press [MENU] to exit Menu mode.  
For your convenience, the following default AGC time  
constant has already been programmed.  
Qꢀ (TXDOL]LQJꢀ9)2ꢀ)UHTXHQFLHVꢀꢂ$ %ꢃ  
SSB: Slow (“  
FSK: Fast (“  
”)  
CW: Fast (“  
AM: Slow (“  
”)  
This function allows you to copy the frequency and  
modulation mode of the active VFO to the inactive  
VFO.  
”)  
”)  
Qꢀ $*&ꢀ7LPHꢀ&RQVWDQWꢀ$GMXVWPHQW  
1 Select the frequency and mode on VFO A or  
VFO B.  
You can pre-set up to 20 values (1 ~ 20) for the  
FAST/SLOW time constant (release time).  
2 Press and hold [A/B (A=B)].  
•
The frequency and mode selected in step 1  
To change the default time constant:  
are duplicated to the inactive VFO.  
1 Press [AGC/T (SEL)] to select FAST or SLOW.  
3 Press [A/B (A=B)] to confirm that the frequency  
•
The AGC time constant icon appears on the  
display (“ ”: Slow, “ ”: Fast).  
was copied to other VFO.  
2 Press and hold [AGC/T (SEL)] to display the  
time constant pre-set value.  
3 Turn the MULTI/CH control to set your desired  
time constant value.  
4 If you want to turn the AGC OFF, press and  
hold [CW T. (AGC OFF)].  
•
“
” appears on the display.  
Note: You cannot adjust the time constant in FM mode.  
29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ꢌꢀꢀ&20081,&$7,1*ꢀ$,'6  
Qꢀ 'HOD\ꢀ7LPH  
75$160,66,21  
If the transceiver returns to reception mode too  
quickly after you stop speaking, your final word  
may not be transmitted. To avoid this, select an  
appropriate delay time that allows all of your words  
to be transmitted without an overly long delay after  
you stop speaking.  
92;ꢀꢂ92,&(ꢈ23(5$7('ꢀ75$160,66,21ꢃ  
VOX eliminates the necessity of manually switching  
to the transmission mode each time you want to  
transmit. The transceiver automatically switches to  
transmission mode when VOX senses that you have  
begun speaking into the microphone.  
1 Select USB, LSB, FM, or AM mode.  
When using VOX, develop the habit of pausing  
between thoughts to allow the transceiver to drop  
back to reception mode briefly. You will then hear if  
anybody wants to interrupt, plus you will have a short  
period to gather your thoughts before speaking again.  
Your listeners will appreciate your consideration as  
well as respect your more articulate conversation.  
2 Press [VOX (LEV)] to switch the VOX function  
ON.  
•
“
” appears.  
3 Press and hold [KEY (DELAY)].  
•
The current setting appears on the  
sub-display. The default is 50 (1500 ms).  
Press [VOX (LEV)] to toggle between VOX ON and  
OFF.  
•
“
” appears when the VOX function is ON.  
4 While speaking into the microphone using your  
normal tone of voice, turn the MULTI/CH control  
such that the transceiver switches to reception  
mode after you have stopped talking.  
Qꢀ 0LFURSKRQHꢀ,QSXWꢀ/HYHO  
•
The selectable range is from 5 to 100  
(150 ms to 3000 ms) in steps of 5, or OFF.  
To enjoy the VOX function, take the time to  
properly adjust the VOX gain. This level controls  
the capability of VOX to detect the presence or  
absence of your voice.  
5 Press [CLR] to store the parameter and exit the  
setting mode.  
In CW mode, this level cannot be adjusted.  
Qꢀ $QWLꢈ92;ꢀ$GMXVWPHQW  
1 Select USB, LSB, FM, or AM mode.  
The TS-590S transceiver has a DSP IC to improve  
and customize incoming/ outgoing audio signals.  
When the VOX function is turned ON, the DSP  
IC adjusts the Anti-VOX level automatically,  
comparing the reception sound level and  
2 Press [VOX (LEV)] to switch the VOX function  
ON.  
•
“
” appears.  
microphone input level. So, you never have to  
worry about adjusting the anti-VOX level.  
Note: When connecting a headset to the Phone jack,  
Anti-VOX will not function.  
3 Press and hold [VOX (LEV)].  
•
The current VOX gain level appears on the  
sub-display.  
Qꢀ 'DWDꢀ92;  
Although the microphone is normally used for  
VOX transmission, you can also utilize the audio  
input of the ACC2 or USB connector. When the  
transceiver detects an audio signal on the ACC2  
or USB connector, it automatically transmits.  
You can select ACC2 or USB via Menu No. 63  
(“Selecting a Data Transmission Line”) {page 58}.  
4 While speaking into the microphone using  
your normal tone of voice, adjust the setting  
(default is 4) using the MULTI/CH control until  
the transceiver reliably switches to transmission  
mode each time you speak.  
1 Select USB, LSB, FM, or AM mode.  
2 Press [MENU], then press [Q-M.IN]/ [Q-MR] or  
turn the MULTI/CH control to select Menu No.  
69.  
•
•
The selectable gain range is from 0 to 9.  
The setting should not allow background  
noise to switch the transceiver to transmit  
mode.  
3 Press [M.IN] to set the VOX with DATA input  
function ON.  
Note: The VOX gain level can be adjusted even if VOX is  
switched OFF or while you are transmitting.  
4 If necessary, adjust the VOX gain level for the  
ACC2 or USB connector {page 31}.  
Note: While VOX with DATA input is set to ON (Menu No.  
69), speaking into the microphone also activates the VOX  
function and you can still transmit using Mic [PTT]. Anti-  
VOX does not function with Data VOX.  
30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ꢌꢀꢀ&20081,&$7,1*ꢀ$,'6  
Qꢀ 'DWDꢀ92;ꢀ'HOD\ꢀ7LPH  
10 dB while you speak.  
•
Using higher compression will not improve  
your signal clarity or apparent signal strength.  
Excessively compressed signals are more  
difficult to understand due to distortion and are  
less pleasant to hear than signals with less  
compression.  
Select an appropriate delay time for after the audio  
signal input to the ACC2 or USB connector ends.  
1 Press [MENU], then press [Q-M.IN]/ [Q-MR] or  
turn the MULTI/CH control to select Menu No. 70.  
2 Press [M.IN]/ [SCAN (SG.SEL)] to set your  
desired delay time.  
5 Press and hold [PROC (LEV)] to exit the Speech  
Processor input level adjustment mode.  
3 Press [MENU] to exit Menu mode.  
6 Press [MIC (CAR)] to enter the Speech Processor  
Qꢀ 86%ꢆꢀ$&&ꢅꢀ92;ꢀ*DLQ  
output level adjustment mode.  
When using the ACC2 or USB connector for VOX  
transmission, take the time to properly adjust the  
VOX gain.  
•
As you speak into the microphone, turn the  
MULTI/CH control so that the ALC meter  
reflects according to your voice level, but does  
not exceed the ALC limit. Press [MIC (CAR)] to  
exit when you finish the adjustment.  
1 Press [MENU], then press [Q-M.IN]/ [Q-MR]  
or turn the MULTI/CH control to select Menu  
No. 71 (USB connector) or Menu No. 72 (ACC2  
connector).  
Qꢀ 6SHHFKꢀ3URFHVVRUꢀ(IIHFW  
When using the Speech Processor, you can  
change its effect.  
2 While sending an audio signal to the ACC2 or  
USB connector, adjust the value (default is 4)  
using [M.IN]/ [SCAN (SG.SEL)] until the  
transceiver reliably switches to transmit mode  
each time you send an audio signal to the  
connector.  
1 Press [MENU], then press [Q-M.IN]/ [Q-MR] or  
turn the MULTI/CH control to select Menu No.  
29.  
2 Press [M.IN]/ [SCAN (SG.SEL)] to set the  
3 Press [MENU] to exit Menu mode.  
Processor Effect to SOFT or HARD (default).  
3 Press [MENU] to exit Menu mode.  
63((&+ꢀ352&(6625  
The Speech Processor levels out large fluctuations in  
your voice while you speak. When using SSB, AM, or  
FM mode, this leveling action effectively raises  
the average TX power (SSB/AM) or raises the  
deviation to an adequate level (FM), resulting in a  
more understandable signal. The amount of voice  
compression is fully adjustable. Using the Speech  
Processor makes it easier to be heard by distant  
stations.  
;,7ꢀꢂ75$160,7ꢀ,1&5(0(17$/ꢀ781,1*ꢃ  
Similar to RIT, XIT provides the ability to change your  
transmission frequency by 9.99 kHz in steps of  
10 Hz without changing your reception frequency. If  
the Fine Tuning function is ON, the frequency step  
size becomes 1 Hz ( 9.999 kHz).  
1 Press [XIT].  
Level  
•
“
” and the XIT offset appear.  
Speech  
Processor  
OFF  
Time  
2 If required, press [CL] to reset the XIT offset to 0.  
3 Turn the RIT/ XIT control to change your transmit  
Level  
frequency.  
Time  
Speech  
Processor  
ON  
4 To turn XIT OFF, press [XIT].  
•
“
” and the offset frequency disappear. The  
transmission frequency is returned to the  
1 Select USB, LSB, AM, or FM mode.  
frequency that was selected prior to step 1.  
2 Press [PROC (LEV)] to turn the Speech Processor  
Note:  
X
ON.  
If the Fine Tuning function is ON, you can adjust the  
frequency within 9.99 kHz.  
The frequency shift set by the XIT control is also used by the  
RIT function. Therefore, changing or clearing the XIT offset  
also affects the RIT offset.  
When the XIT frequency goes beyond the available  
transmission frequency, the transceiver automatically stops  
transmitting.  
•
“
” appears.  
X
3 Press and hold [PROC (LEV)] to enter the Speech  
Processor input level adjustment mode.  
X
4 As you speak into the microphone, turn the  
MULTI/CH control so that the compression meter  
indicates that the compression level is around  
31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ꢌꢀꢀ&20081,&$7,1*ꢀ$,'6  
ꢀ
)UHTXHQF\ꢀ5HVSRQVHꢀ&XUYHV  
&86720,=,1*ꢀ75$160,66,21ꢀ6,*1$/ꢀ  
&+$5$&7(5,67,&6  
The quality of your transmission signal is important,  
regardless of which on-air activity you pursue.  
However, it is easy to be casual and overlook this fact  
since you don’t listen to your own signal.  
oFF  
Amplitude  
Hb2  
HP  
bb1  
c
The following sub-sections provide information that  
will help you tailor your transmission signal.  
0.1  
1.0  
2.0  
Audio frequency (kHz)  
Qꢀ 7;ꢀ)LOWHUꢀ%DQGZLGWKꢀꢂ66%ꢆꢀ$0ꢃ  
Use Menu No. 25 to select one of the following TX  
low-cut filters: 10, 100, 200, 300 (default), 400, or  
500 Hz.  
Note: When using the ARCP-590, you can temporarily change  
each preset value.  
75$160,7ꢀ,1+,%,7  
Use Menu No. 26 to select one of the following TX  
high-cut filters: 2500, 2600, 2700 (default), 2800,  
2900, or 3000 Hz.  
Transmit Inhibit prevents the transceiver from being  
placed in transmission mode. No signal can be  
transmitted when this function is ON, even if Mic [PTT]  
is pressed.  
Qꢀ 7;ꢀ)LOWHUꢀ%DQGZLGWKꢀꢂ/6%ꢈ'$7$ꢆꢀ86%ꢈ'$7$ꢃ  
•
•
TX Inhibit OFF: Transmission is allowed.  
Use Menu No. 27 to select one of the following TX  
low-cut filters: 10, 100, 200, 300 (default), 400, or  
500 Hz.  
TX Inhibit ON: Transmission is not allowed.  
Switch this function ON or OFF via Menu No. 60.  
The default is OFF.  
Use Menu No. 28 to select one of the following TX  
high-cut filters: 2500, 2600, 2700 (default), 2800,  
2900, or 3000 Hz.  
%86<ꢀ/2&.287  
Busy Lockout prevents the transceiver from being  
placed in transmit mode if the current operating  
frequency is busy; in other words, if the squelch is  
open, you cannot transmit.  
Qꢀ 7;ꢀ(TXDOL]HUꢀꢂ66%ꢆꢀ$0ꢆꢀ)0ꢃ  
Use Menu No. 30 to change the transmission  
frequency characteristics of your signal. You can  
select from 1 of 6 different transmission profiles  
including the default flat response. Selecting any  
of the following items from the Menu causes  
•
•
Busy Lockout OFF: Transmission is allowed.  
Busy Lockout ON: Transmission is not allowed.  
“
” to appear on the display.  
Switch this function ON or OFF via Menu No. 74.  
The default is OFF.  
•
Off (oFF):  
The flat frequency response for SSB, FM, and  
AM (default).  
&+$1*,1*ꢀ)5(48(1&<ꢀ:+,/(ꢀ75$160,77,1*  
Moving your frequency while transmitting is usually an  
unwise practice due to the risk of interfering with other  
stations. However, if necessary, by using the Tuning  
control you can change the operating frequency while  
transmitting. You also can change the XIT offset  
frequency while in transmission mode.  
•
•
•
High boost 1 (Hb1)/ High boost 2 (Hb2):  
Emphasizes higher audio frequencies; effective  
for a bassi voice. High boost 2 does not reduce  
the low frequency as much as High boost 1.  
Formant pass (FP):  
While transmitting, if you select a frequency outside  
the transmission frequency range, the transceiver is  
automatically forced to return to reception mode.  
Improves clarity by suppressing audio  
frequencies outside the normal voice frequency  
range.  
Bass boost 1 (bb1)/ Bass boost 2 (bb2):  
Emphasizes lower audio frequencies;  
effective for a voice with more high frequency  
components. Bass boost 2 emphasizes more  
low frequency response.  
•
•
Conventional (c):  
Emphasizes by 3 dB frequencies at 600 Hz and  
higher.  
User (U):  
Reserved for the optional ARCP software.  
Off (oFF) is programmed at the factory as a  
default.  
32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ꢌꢀꢀ&20081,&$7,1*ꢀ$,'6  
&:ꢀ%5($.ꢈ,1  
(/(&7521,&ꢀ.(<(5  
Break-in allows you to transmit CW without manually  
switching between transmission and reception modes.  
Two types of Break-ins are available: Semi Break-in  
and Full Break-in.  
This transceiver has a built-in electronic keyer that  
can be used by connecting a keyer paddle to the  
transceiver’s rear panel. Refer to “Keys for CW  
(PADDLE and KEY)” {page 2} for details regarding  
this connection. The built-in keyer supports lambic  
(squeeze) operation.  
Semi Break-in:  
When the key contacts open, the transceiver  
automatically waits for the duration of the time  
period you selected. The transceiver then returns to  
reception mode.  
(/(&7521,&ꢀ.(<(5ꢀ02'(  
There are 2 modes of operation when using an  
electronic keyer for lambic keying operation. Mode A  
completes the current key sequence you are sending  
when you release the paddles. Mode B sends one  
more key, opposite the current key you are sending,  
upon releasing the paddles.  
Full Break-in:  
As soon as the key contacts open, the transceiver  
returns to reception mode.  
86,1*ꢀ6(0,ꢀ%5($.ꢈ,1ꢀ25ꢀ)8//ꢀ%5($.ꢈ,1  
1 Press [CW/FSK (REV)] until you select CW mode.  
1 Press [MENU], then press [Q-M.IN]/ [Q-MR] or  
turn the MULTI/CH control to select Menu No. 32.  
•
“CW” appears.  
2 Press [VOX (LEV)].  
” appears.  
3 Press and hold [KEY (DELAY)].  
2 Press [M.IN]/ [SCAN (SG.SEL)] to select “A” or “B”  
(default).  
•
“
3 Press [MENU] to exit Menu mode.  
&+$1*,1*ꢀ.(<,1*ꢀ63(('  
•
The current setting (FBK or delay time)  
appears. The default is 50 (500 ms).  
The keying speed of the electronic keyer is fully  
adjustable. Selecting the appropriate speed is  
important in order to send error-free CW that other  
operators can copy solidly. Selecting a speed that is  
beyond your keying ability will only result in mistakes.  
You will obtain the best results by selecting a speed  
that is close to the speed used by the other station.  
4 Turn the MULTI/CH control to select “FBK” (Full  
Break-in) or a delay time for Semi Break-in.  
•
Delay time ranges from 5 to 100 (50 ms to  
1000 ms) in steps of 5.  
1 Press [CW/FSK (REV)] until you select CW mode.  
•
“CW” appears.  
2 Press [KEY (DELAY)].  
•
The current keying speed appears. The default  
is 20 (wpm).  
5 Begin sending.  
•
The transceiver automatically switches to  
transmission mode.  
•
When FBK (Full Break-in) is selected:  
The transceiver immediately switches to  
reception mode when the key opens.  
3 While keying the paddle and listening to the TX  
(transmission) sidetone, turn the MULTI/CH control  
to select the appropriate speed.  
•
When a delay time is selected:  
The transceiver switches to reception mode  
after the delay time that you have selected has  
passed.  
•
The speeds range from 4 to 60 wpm, in steps of  
1 wpm. The larger the number, the faster the  
speed.  
4 Press [KEY (DELAY)] again to complete the  
6 Press [CLR] to exit.  
Note: FBK (Full Break-in) cannot be used with the TL-922/  
922A linear amplifier.  
setting.  
Note: When using the semi-automatic “Bug” function, the  
selected speed applies only to the rate that dots are sent.  
Qꢀ ,QYDOLGꢀ%UHDNꢈ,Qꢀ2SHUDWLRQ  
You can make break-in operation invalid while  
performing the keying speed adjustment.  
To switch this function ON, access Menu No. 43,  
and select “on” (default is “oFF”).  
•
“VOX” blinks when break-in operation is  
enabled.  
33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ꢌꢀꢀ&20081,&$7,1*ꢀ$,'6  
5,6(ꢀ7,0(ꢀ2)ꢀ&:  
&:ꢀ0(66$*(ꢀ0(025<  
The rise time of a CW signal is the time for the RF  
output to rise to its maximum power after the key is  
closed.  
This transceiver has 4 memory channels for storing  
CW messages. Each memory channel can store  
approximately 50 characters (equivalent of 250 dots).  
These memory channels are ideal for storing contest  
exchanges that you want to send repeatedly. Stored  
messages can be played back to check message  
content or for transmitting.  
1 Press [MENU], then press [Q-M.IN]/ [Q-MR] or  
turn the MULTI/CH control to select Menu No. 35.  
2 Press [M.IN]/ [SCAN (SG.SEL)] to select “1”, “2”,  
“4”, or “6” (default).  
The electronic keyer has a function that allows you  
to interrupt playback and manually inject your own  
keying. To switch this function ON, access Menu  
No. 33 and select “on”. The default is OFF.  
•
The default setting of 6 ms is fine for slow or  
medium keying speeds and normal weighting  
(dot/ dash ratio). 1, 2, or 4 ms are good for  
faster keying speeds.  
The electronic keyer can also repeatedly play back  
the message that you stored. To switch this function  
ON, access Menu No. 56 and select “on”. The default  
is OFF.  
3 Press [MENU] to exit Menu mode.  
$872ꢀ:(,*+7,1*  
For repetitive message playback, you can change  
the interval between each series of messages. Use  
Menu No. 57 and select the time in the range of 0 to  
60 seconds, in steps of 1 second.  
The electronic keyer can automatically change the  
dot/ dash weighting. Weighting is the ratio of dash  
length to dot length. The weighting changes with your  
keying speed automatically, thus making your keying  
easier for other operators to copy (default).  
Note:  
X
This function cannot be used when the Bug Key function is  
ON.  
Access Menu No. 36 to select “AUto” or “2.5” ~ “4.0”  
(in steps of 0.1) fixed weight ratio. The default is  
“auto”. When a fixed weight ratio is selected, the dot/  
dash weight ratio is locked, irregardless of the keying  
speed.  
X
Operating the keyer paddle while Menu No. 33 is OFF,  
cancels message playback. Even if message playback does  
not stop because of your keying start timing, you can cancel  
playback by pressing [CLR].  
X
When the constant recording function of the optional VGS-1  
is ON, you cannot use [RX/4 (REC)].  
Qꢀ 5HYHUVHꢀ.H\LQJꢀ:HLJKWꢀ5DWLR  
Qꢀ 6WRULQJꢀ&:ꢀ0HVVDJHV  
Auto Weighting increases the weighting as you  
increase your keying speed. However, the  
electronic keyer also can decrease the weighting  
as you increase your keying speed.  
1 Press [CW/FSK (REV)] until you select CW  
mode.  
•
“CW” appears.  
To switch this function ON, access Menu No. 37,  
and select “on”. The default is OFF.  
2 Press and hold [CH1 (REC)], [CH2 (REC)],  
[CH3 (REC)], or [RX/4 (REC)] to select a  
memory channel to be recorded.  
When setting Menu No. 36 to “Auto”, refer to the  
following.  
Reverse  
Keying  
Weight  
Keying Speed (wpm)  
•
If Constant Recording is ON (Menu No.  
55), you cannot store a message to [RX/4  
(REC)] {page 60}. The default is ON.  
4 ~ 24  
25 ~ 44  
1:3.0  
45 ~ 60  
OFF  
ON  
1:2.8  
1:3.2  
1:3.2  
1:2.8  
1:3.0  
3 Begin sending using the keyer paddle.  
The message you send is stored in memory.  
•
%8*ꢀ.(<ꢀ)81&7,21  
The built-in electronic keyer can also be used as a  
semi-automatic key. Semi-automatic keys are also  
known as “Bugs”. When this function is ON, dots are  
generated in the normal manner by the electronic  
keyer. Dashes, however, are manually generated by  
the operator by holding the keyer paddle closed for  
the appropriate length of time.  
4 To complete the message storage, press [CLR]  
or [CH1 (REC)]/ [CH2 (REC)]/ [CH3 (REC)]/  
[RX/4 (REC)] to stop.  
•
When the number reaches 100(%), the  
memory becomes full and recording  
automatically stops.  
To switch this function ON, access Menu No. 38 and  
select “on”. The default is OFF.  
Note: When the Bug Key function is ON, CW Message Memory  
(see below) cannot be used.  
Note: If you do not operate the keyer paddle after starting to  
record a message, a pause is stored in the channel.  
34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ꢌꢀꢀ&20081,&$7,1*ꢀ$,'6  
Qꢀ &KHFNLQJꢀ&:ꢀ0HVVDJHVꢀZLWKRXWꢀ7UDQVPLWWLQJ  
Qꢀ &KDQJLQJꢀWKHꢀ,QWHUꢈPHVVDJHꢀ,QWHUYDOꢀ7LPH  
1 Press [CW/FSK (REV)] until you select CW  
For the message playback repeat, access Menu  
No. 56 and select “on”. You can also change the  
interval playback time of the message. Access  
Menu No. 57 and select the time in the range of 0  
to 60 seconds, in steps of 1 second.  
Note: Menu Nos. 56 and 57 settings are shared with the  
voice communication modes when the optional VGS-1 is  
installed.  
mode.  
•
“CW” appears.  
2 If Break-in is ON, press [VOX (LEV)] to turn  
VOX OFF.  
3 Press [CH1 (REC)], [CH2 (REC)], [CH3  
(REC)], or [RX/4 (REC)] to select the channel  
to be played back.  
Qꢀ &KDQJLQJꢀWKHꢀ&:ꢀ6LGHWRQHꢀ9ROXPH  
•
•
The message is played back.  
Turning the AF control does not change the CW  
sidetone playback volume. To change the CW  
sidetone volume, access Menu No. 04 and select  
“oFF”, or “1” to “9”. The default is “5”.  
To play back the messages stored in  
the other channels in sequence, press  
the corresponding channel keys during  
playback. Up to 4 channels can be queued  
at the same time.  
Qꢀ ,QVHUWꢀ.H\LQJ  
If you operate a CW keyer manually while playing  
back a recorded CW message, the transceiver  
stops playing back the message. However, during  
contests or regular QSOs, you may sometimes  
want to insert a different number or message at a  
certain point in the recorded message.  
•
•
While playing back the messages, you can  
also adjust the keyer speed by pressing  
[KEY (DELAY)] and turning the MULTI/CH  
control.  
In this case, first record the CW message as  
usual {page 34}, without the additional number or  
message you want to insert. Then, access Menu  
No. 33 and select “on”.  
To interrupt playback, press [CLR].  
Qꢀ 7UDQVPLWWLQJꢀ&:ꢀ0HVVDJHV  
Messages can be transmitted using Semi Break-in/  
Full Break-in or manual TX/ RX switching.  
Now, if you operate a CW keyer while you play  
back a recorded message, the transceiver pauses  
the playback of the recorded message, instead  
of stopping it. When you finish sending the  
number or message with the keyer, the transceiver  
resumes playback of the message.  
1 Press [CW/FSK (REV)] until you select CW  
mode.  
•
“CW” appears.  
2 To use Semi Break-in/ Full Break-in, press  
[VOX (LEV)].  
)5(48(1&<ꢀ&255(&7,21ꢀ)25ꢀ&:  
•
•
“
” appears.  
If you operate both SSB and CW modes, you would  
sometimes use SSB mode (USB or LSB) just to  
watch and listen to CW signals. It is fine just to  
monitor those CW signals but you have experienced  
that changing the mode from SSB to CW results in  
losing the target CW signal. This is because the  
frequency on the display always shows the true carrier  
frequency for all modes. If you want the transceiver to  
shift the reception frequency to trace the receiving CW  
signal when changing the mode from SSB (USB or  
LSB) to CW, switch this function ON. The transceiver  
shifts the reception frequency when changing the  
mode from SSB to CW, so you can still hear the target  
signal and instantly transmit the signal in CW without  
adjusting the frequency.  
If you are not using Semi Break-in/ Full  
Break-in, press [SEND].  
3 Press [CH1 (REC)], [CH2 (REC)], [CH3  
(REC)], or [RX/4 (REC)] select the channel to  
be played back.  
•
The message is played back and transmitted  
automatically.  
•
To transmit the messages stored in  
the other channels in sequence, press  
the corresponding channel keys during  
playback. Up to 4 channels can be queued  
at the same time.  
•
•
While playing back the messages, you can  
also adjust the keyer speed by pressing  
[KEY (DELAY)] and turning the MULTI/CH  
control.  
1 Press [MENU], then press [Q-M.IN]/ [Q-MR] or  
turn the MULTI/CH control to select Menu No. 42.  
2 Press [M.IN] to select “on”.  
To cancel transmission, press [CLR].  
3 Press [MENU] to exit Menu mode.  
35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ꢌꢀꢀ&20081,&$7,1*ꢀ$,'6  
$872ꢀ&:ꢀ7;ꢀ,1ꢀ66%ꢀ02'(  
If you operate both SSB and CW modes, you can  
configure the transceiver to change the operating  
mode from SSB (USB or LSB) to CW and then  
transmit in CW mode automatically when you operate  
the CW keyers.  
The mode automatically changes from USB to CW  
and LSB to CWR, regardless of the setting for Menu  
No. 42 (Frequency correction for changing SSB to  
CW). Therefore, when the CW signal is received in  
SSB mode, you can operate the paddle or keyer to  
immediately communicate CW with another station.  
1 Press [MENU], then press [Q-M.IN]/ [Q-MR] or  
turn the MULTI/CH control to access Menu No. 41.  
2 Press [M.IN] to select “on”.  
3 Press [MENU] to exit Menu mode.  
Note: You must switch the CW Break-in function ON to change  
the mode and transmit in CW mode {page 32}.  
0,&ꢀ83ꢆꢀ':1ꢀ.(<ꢀ3$''/(ꢀ02'(  
This function allows you to send CW messages  
without using an optional paddle {page 2}. The Mic  
[UP] key can be used as the dot paddle and the Mic  
[DWN] key can be used as the dash paddle.  
To activate Mic UP/ DWN key Paddle mode:  
1 Press [MENU], then press [Q-M.IN]/ [Q-MR] or  
turn the MULTI/CH control to access Menu No. 40.  
2 Press [M.IN] to select “PA”.  
3 Press [MENU] to exit Menu mode.  
•
Press and hold Mic [DWN] to send dots or Mic  
[UP] to send dashes in CW mode.  
4 To exit Mic UP/ DWN key Paddle mode, access  
Menu No. 40 and select “PF”.  
6:$3ꢀ'27ꢀ$1'ꢀ'$6+ꢀ3$''/(ꢀ326,7,216  
This function reverses the position of the dot and dash  
paddle positions. As a default, the left paddle sends  
dots and the right paddle sends dashes. When this  
function is ON, the left paddle will send dashes and  
the right paddle will send dots.  
1 Press [MENU], then press [Q-M.IN]/ [Q-MR] or  
turn the MULTI/CH control to access Menu No. 39.  
2 Press [M.IN] to select “on”.  
3 Press [MENU] to exit Menu mode.  
•
The left paddle now sends dashes and the right  
paddle now sends dots. To return to the normal  
paddle positions, access Menu No. 39 and  
select “oFF”.  
36  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
'$7$ꢀ&20081,&$7,216  
8 Begin sending data from your computer.  
5$',2ꢀ7(/(7<3(ꢀꢂ577<ꢃ  
•
Press and hold [PWR (TX MONI)] to monitor  
your signals. Press and hold [PWR (TX MONI)]  
again to quit this function.  
RTTY is the data communications mode with the  
longest history. It was originally designed for use with  
mechanical teletypewriters which were often used  
before personal computers became common. Now  
you can easily start operating RTTY with a personal  
computer and MCP. Unlike Packet, each time you  
type a letter, it is transmitted over the air. What you  
type is transmitted and displayed on the computer  
screen of the recipient.  
9 When finished transmitting, enter a command from  
your computer to return to reception mode.  
•
The TX-RX LED changes from red (TX) to  
green (RX).  
The following frequencies (measured in kHz) are  
commonly used for RTTY operation:  
RTTY operation uses frequency shift keying (FSK)  
and the 5-bit Baudot code or the 7-bit ASCII code to  
transmit information.  
IARU Region 1  
U.S.A./ Canada  
(Europe/ Africa)  
For cable connections, refer to “RTTY OPERATION”  
{page 68}.  
1800 ~ 1840  
3605 ~ 3645 (DX: 3590)  
7080 ~ 7100 (DX: 7040)  
10140 ~ 10150  
1838 ~ 1842  
3580 ~ 3620  
For further information, consult reference books about  
Amateur Radio.  
7035 ~ 7045  
10140 ~ 10150  
14080 ~ 14099.5  
18101 ~ 18109  
21080 ~ 21120  
22920 ~ 24929  
28050 ~ 28150  
1 Access Menu No. 44 and select an FSK shift.  
14070 ~ 14099.5  
18100 ~ 18110  
•
FSK shift is the difference in frequencies  
between a mark and a space.  
•
The 170 Hz shift (default) is normally used on  
the Amateur bands for the RTTY.  
21070 ~ 21100  
24920 ~ 24930  
2 Access Menu No. 45 and select a key-down  
28070 ~ 28150  
polarity.  
•
Select “oFF” (default) to transmit a mark when  
keying down or “on” to transmit a space.  
3+$6(ꢈ6+,)7ꢀ.(<,1*ꢀꢇꢁꢀ%$8'ꢀꢂ36.ꢇꢁꢃ  
3 Access Menu No. 46 and select “2175” (high tone)  
PSK31 is a digital modulation method used in  
amateur radio communications. You can perform data  
communications in real-time using a keyboard, like  
RTTY. Additionally, because of the narrow bandwidth  
(31.25 Hz) you can even use PSK31 on congested  
frequencies. Another merit to PSK31 is that it can  
be enjoyed with a simple antenna and low transmit  
power.  
or “1275” (low tone) for mark.  
•
High tone (default) is commonly used  
nowadays.  
4 Select an operating frequency.  
5 Press [CW/FSK (REV)] to select FSK mode.  
•
“FSK” appears.  
Using the sound function of your PC along with  
PSK31 software, many amateur radio operators enjoy  
PSK31.  
•
Refer to “TNC AND MCP” {page 69} for  
connections.  
•
If necessary, access Menu No. 67 to configure  
the appropriate audio output level for your  
MCP. The audio output level of ANO (ACC2  
connector/ pin 3) changes {page 65}. The AF  
control cannot be used to adjust the audio level  
for your MCP.  
•
When managing PSK31 using the sound capability  
of a PC, use SSB mode.  
•
•
•
Set AGC to fast.  
Turn off the speech processor.  
6 Some stations may be operating in Reverse shift.  
In this case, press and hold [CW/FSK (REV)] to  
reverse the shift (the upper sideband is used).  
Refer to “EXTERNAL AUDIO SETTINGS”  
{page 58} for Audio Settings.  
For further information, consult reference books about  
Amateur Radio.  
•
“FSR” appears.  
•
Traditionally, the lower sideband is used for  
FSK operation. Press and hold [CW/FSK  
(REV)] again to return to the lower sideband.  
“FSK” appears.  
7 Follow the instructions provided with your MCP  
and enter a command from your computer to  
transmit.  
•
The TX-RX LED changes from green (RX) to  
red (TX).  
37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5(-(&7,1*ꢀ,17(5)(5(1&(  
Qꢀ &:ꢆꢀ)6.ꢀ0RGH  
'63ꢀ),/7(56  
1 Select CW or FSK mode.  
Kenwood digital signal processing (DSP) technology  
is adapted to this transceiver. Using DSP filtering  
(AF), you can control the bandwidth, cancel the  
multiple jamming beat, and reduce the noise level.  
2 Turn the LO/WIDTH control clockwise  
to increase the bandwidth (wide), or  
counterclockwise to decrease the bandwidth  
(narrow).  
&+$1*,1*ꢀ7+(ꢀ'63ꢀ),/7(5ꢀ%$1':,'7+  
Desired signal  
Interfering  
signal  
For improving interference reduction capability, this  
transceiver also provides IF filters designed using  
DSP technology. When in SSB, FM, or AM mode, you  
can change the filter bandwidth by altering its low and/  
or high cut-off frequency. For CW, FSK, and DATA  
modes, you can change the filter bandwidth by directly  
specifying a bandwidth. Changing the filter bandwidth  
does not affect the current receive frequency.  
Interfering  
signal  
Before  
After  
•
The meter display changes, based on the  
bandwidth you are setting up.  
Mode Bandwidth Selection (Hz)  
Default  
500 Hz  
500 Hz  
50, 80, 100, 150, 200, 250,  
300, 400, 500, 600, 1000,  
1500, 2000, 2500  
CW  
FSK  
250, 500, 1000, 1500  
3 As for CW, you can further adjust the shift  
frequency for the pass band. Turn the  
HI/SHIFT control clockwise to increase the  
shift frequency (high), or counterclockwise to  
decrease the shift frequency (low).  
Qꢀ 66%ꢆꢀ)0ꢆꢀ$0ꢀ0RGH  
1 Select SSB, FM, or AM mode.  
2 Turn the LO/WIDTH control clockwise to raise  
the low cut-off frequency, or counterclockwise  
to lower the low cut-off frequency.  
Shift Frequency (Hz)  
Default  
300, 350, 400, 450, 500, 550, 600,  
650, 700, 750, 800, 850, 900, 950,  
1000  
800 Hz  
Mode  
Low cut Frequency (Hz)  
Default  
300 Hz  
100 Hz  
SSB/ 0, 50, 100, 200, 300, 400,  
FM  
AM  
Qꢀ 'DWDꢀ0RGH  
500, 600, 700, 800, 900, 1000  
0, 100, 200, 300  
1 Select Data mode (USB-DATA/LSB-DATA).  
2 Turn the LO/WIDTH control clockwise  
to increase the bandwidth (wide), or  
counterclockwise to decrease the bandwidth  
(narrow).  
Turn the HI/SHIFT control clockwise to raise the  
high cut-off frequency, or counterclockwise to  
lower the high cut-off frequency.  
Default  
Mode  
High cut Frequency (Hz)  
Default  
2600 Hz  
5000 Hz  
Bandwidth Selection (Hz)  
1000, 1200, 1400, 1600,  
50, 80, 100, 150, 200, 250, 300, 400,  
500, 600, 1000, 1500, 2000, 2500  
2500 Hz  
SSB/ 1800, 2000, 2200, 2400,  
FM  
2600, 2800, 3000, 3400,  
4000, 5000  
3 Turn the HI/SHIFT control clockwise to increase  
the shift frequency (high), or counterclockwise  
to decrease the shift frequency (low).  
AM  
2500, 3000, 4000, 5000  
Low cut-off frequency  
Shift Frequency (Hz)  
Default  
High cut-off frequency  
1000, 1100, 1200, 1300, 1400, 1500,  
1600, 1700, 1800, 1900, 2000, 2100, 1500 Hz  
2210  
Desired signal  
Interfering  
signal  
Interfering  
signal  
Qꢀ ,)ꢀ)LOWHUꢀ$ꢀDQGꢀ%  
This transceiver has 2 built-in IF filters: A and  
B. The IF Filter settings are stored with the last  
settings of the LO/WIDTH and HI/SHIFT controls.  
0 Hz 1 KHz  
5 KHz  
Note: The cut-off frequencies can be adjusted  
independently for each operating mode. When you change  
the operating mode, the previous setting is recalled for each  
operating mode.  
Press [IF FIL] to toggle between IF Filter setting A  
and B.  
•
“
” appears when IF filter setting A is selected  
and “ ” appears when IF filter setting B is  
selected.  
38  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ꢍꢀꢀ5(-(&7,1*ꢀ,17(5)(5(1&(  
Qꢀ 1RWFKꢀ)LOWHUꢀ%DQGZLGWK  
Press and hold [IF FIL] to momentarily display each  
setting value of the DSP filter band as follows:  
Press and hold [NOTCH (WIDE)] to toggle the  
Notch filter bandwidth between NORMAL and  
WIDE.  
SSB/ AM/ FM mode:  
High cut Frequency > Low cut Frequency  
CW/ SSB data mode:  
Shift Frequency > Bandwidth  
•
“
” appears when the Notch filter  
bandwidth is set to WIDE.  
FSK mode: Bandwidth only  
%($7ꢀ&$1&(/ꢀꢂ66%ꢆꢀ$0ꢃ  
Two types of Beat Cancel DSP filters are available.  
Beat Cancel 1 (BC1) is effective for removing a weak  
beat or continuous beat signals. Beat Cancel 2 (BC2)  
is effective for removing intermittent beat signals, such  
as CW signals.  
$872ꢀ127&+ꢀ),/7(5ꢀꢂ66%ꢃ  
The Auto Notch filter automatically locates and  
attenuates any single interfering tone within the  
receive pass band. This function operates digitally  
at the IF filter level, hence it can affect your S-meter  
reading and may also affect (slightly attenuate) your  
desired signal. However, controlling the AGC level by  
notching out the strong interfering beat signals could  
bring up the desired SSB signal that is covered by the  
interfering beat signal. If the interfering tone is weak,  
you may find that Beat Cancel eliminates them more  
effectively.  
Filter pass band (AF)  
Interfering  
tones  
Desired  
signal  
Before  
After  
Receive pass band  
Interfering  
tones  
Press [BC (A.NOTCH)] to cycle through Beat Cancel  
1, Beat Cancel 2, and OFF.  
•
“
” or “  
” appears when the Beat Cancel  
Desired  
signal  
function is ON.  
•
The interfering beat signals are removed.  
Before  
After  
12,6(ꢀ5('8&7,21ꢀꢂ$//ꢀ02'(6ꢃ  
This transceiver provides 2 types of Noise Reduction  
functions (NR1 and NR2) for reducing random noise  
which interferes with the desired signal.  
Press and hold [BC (A.NOTCH)] to toggle the Auto  
Notch Filter ON and OFF.  
•
•
“
” appears when this function is ON.  
The interfering beat signals are notched out.  
NR1 differs, depending on the reception mode.  
When receiving a voice call in SSB/ FM/ AM mode,  
noise reduction uses a spectrum subtraction system.  
When receiving a non-voice call in CW/ FSK mode,  
noise reduction uses a LMS adaptive filter which  
emphasizes the periodic signal.  
Qꢀ $XWRꢀ1RWFKꢀ7UDFNLQJꢀ6SHHG  
If the interfering beat signals change the tone  
frequency randomly, you can adjust the Auto Notch  
tracking speed.  
NR2 uses a SPAC format, which extracts a periodic  
signal from within the received signal.  
1 Press [MENU], then press [Q-M.IN]/ [Q-MR] or  
turn the MULTI/CH control to select Menu No.  
24  
Press [NR (LEV)] to cycle between NR1, NR2, and  
OFF.  
2 Press [M.IN]/ [SCAN (SG.SEL)] to select the  
level from FIX (0), and 1 to 4.  
•
“
” or “  
” appears, depending on which  
noise reduction filter is selected.  
•
Level 1 is the slowest beat tone tracking  
speed and Level 4 is the fastest. FIX  
terminates the beat tone tracking. Adjust  
this parameter manually to remove the beat  
signal if necessary.  
3 Press [MENU] to exit Menu mode.  
0$18$/ꢀ127&+ꢀ),/7(5ꢀꢂ66%ꢆꢀ&:ꢆꢀ)6.ꢃ  
Use manual notch when you want to vary the width of  
the notch while verifying the interfering signal.  
1 Press [NOTCH (WIDE)] to toggle the Manual  
Notch Filter ON and OFF.  
•
“
” appears when this function is ON.  
2 Turn the NOTCH control to adjust to the point  
where beat noise just disappears.  
39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ꢍꢀꢀ5(-(&7,1*ꢀ,17(5)(5(1&(  
Qꢀ 6HWWLQJꢀWKHꢀ15ꢁꢀ/HYHOꢀ$GMXVWPHQW  
35(ꢈ$03/,),(5  
NR1 uses an adaptive filter to reduce the noise  
element from the received signals. When the S/N  
ratio is reasonably good in SSB, using NR1 will  
improve the S/N further.  
Switching the pre-amplifier OFF may help reduce  
interference from adjacent frequencies.  
Press [PRE (ANT 1/2)] to toggle the pre-amplifier ON  
and OFF.  
While NR1 is ON, you can further adjust the noise  
reduction level by pressing and holding [NR (LEV)],  
then turning the MULTI/CH control to select the  
level from 1 to 10. The default is 5. The level is  
saved separately for SSB/FM/AM and CW/FSK.  
•
“
” appears when this function is ON.  
The ON/ OFF setting will be automatically stored in  
the current band. Each time you select the same  
band, the same setting will be automatically selected  
The frequency range of each band is provided in the  
table below (under “ATTENUATOR”).  
Qꢀ 6HWWLQJꢀWKHꢀ15ꢅꢀ7LPHꢀ&RQVWDQW  
You can change the correlation time for NR2  
(SPAC). When in SSB mode, select the correlation  
time that allows you to hear signals with clarity.  
When receiving CW, it is best to select the longest  
correlation time that allows reliable reception. The  
longer the correlation time, the better the S/N ratio.  
$77(18$725  
The Attenuator reduces the level of received  
signals. This function is useful when there is strong  
interference from adjacent frequencies.  
When NR2 is ON, press and hold [NR (LEV)], then  
turn the MULTI/CH control to select the correlation  
time from 2 to 20 ms. The default is 20 ms.  
Press [ATT (RX ANT)] to toggle the attenuator ON  
and OFF.  
•
“
” appears when this function is ON.  
Note:  
The ON/ OFF setting will be automatically stored  
in the current band. Each time you select the  
same frequency band, the attenuator setting will be  
automatically recalled. The frequency range of each  
band is shown below.  
X
When using Noise Reduction 1 in SSB, FM, or AM  
mode, the beat signal is suppressed along with the  
normal signal. This is not a malfunction.  
ꢀX Using Noise Reduction 2 in SSB mode may lower the  
clarity of signals or induce pulse noise, depending on the  
conditions.  
Frequency  
Band (MHz)  
Pre-amplifier  
(Default)  
Attenuator  
(Default)  
12,6(ꢀ%/$1.(5  
The Noise Blanker is designed to reduce pulse noise  
such as that generated by automobile ignitions. The  
Noise Blanker does not function in FM mode.  
0.03 ~ 0.522  
0.522 ~ 2.5  
2.5 ~ 4.1  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
ON  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
•
NB1 performs blanking through an analog circuit.  
NB2 performs blanking using DSP.  
4.1 ~ 6.9  
6.9 ~ 7.5  
Press [NB (LEV)] to cycle between Noise Blanker 1,  
Noise Blanker 2, and OFF.  
7.5 ~ 10.5  
10.5 ~ 14.5  
14.5 ~ 18.5  
18.5 ~ 21.5  
21.5 ~ 25.5  
25.5 ~ 30.0  
30.0 ~ 60.0  
ON  
•
“
” or “  
” appears, depending on which  
Noise Blanker is selected.  
ON  
You can further adjust the Noise Blanker level from  
1 to 10. The default level is 6. Press and hold [NB  
(LEV)], then turn the MULTI/CH control to adjust the  
Noise Blanker level.  
ON  
ON  
ON  
•
“NB LV.” and the current level appear on the  
sub-display.  
ON  
Note:  
X
X
X
X
The Noise Blanker is available only for SSB, CW, FSK, and  
AM modes.  
Increasing the Noise Blanker level degrades the  
intermodulation characteristics of the transceiver.  
For effective Noise Blanker operation, experiment with both  
NB1 and NB2 on each band.  
When using Noise Blanker 2 and a CW signal is received,  
there are times when the received signal may be distorted.  
This is not a malfunction.  
&:ꢀ5(9(56(ꢀꢂ5(&(37,21ꢃ  
This function pivots the BFO from the default position  
(USB) to another position (LSB) in CW mode. It is  
sometimes effective to remove the interfering signals  
from the IF passband by pivoting the BFO.  
1 Press [CW/FSK (REV)] until “CW” appears.  
2 Press and hold [CW/FSK (REV)].  
•
“CW” changes to “CWR”.  
3 To recover the default BFO position, press and  
hold [CW/FSK (REV)] again.  
•
“CWR” changes to “CW”.  
40  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
0(025<ꢀ)($785(6  
0(025<ꢀ&+$11(/6  
This transceiver provides you with 110 memory  
channels, numbered 00 to 99 and P0 to P9, for  
storing operating frequency data, modes, and other  
information. Memory channels 00 to 99 are called  
Conventional Memory Channels. Memory channels  
P0 to P9 are designed for programming VFO tuning  
ranges and scan ranges. The data you can store is  
listed below.  
•
To exit Memory Scroll mode and abort the  
storage process, press [CLR].  
4 Turn the MULTI/CH control, or press Mic [UP]/  
[DWN] to select a memory channel.  
•
You can also select a channel by entering  
a 2-digit number, such as 12, using the  
numeric keys. Press [ENT], [1.8 (1)], [3.5  
(2)] for example.  
Conventional memory channels are used for storing  
data you will often recall. For example, you may store  
the frequency where you regularly meet your club  
members.  
Channel  
00 ~ 99  
Channel  
P0 ~ P9  
Yes1  
(simplex)  
Parameter  
RX Frequency  
5 Press [M.IN] again to store the data.  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
•
The previous data stored in the channel is  
overwritten.  
TX Frequency  
Mode for RX  
Mode for TX  
Yes1  
(simplex)  
Qꢀ 6SOLWꢈ)UHTXHQF\ꢀ&KDQQHOV  
1 Press [A/B (A=B)] to select VFO A or VFO B.  
Programmable VFO  
Start/ End Frequencies  
No  
Yes  
•
“
” or “  
” appears to show which VFO  
is selected.  
Tone Frequency  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
2 Select the frequency, mode, etc., to be stored.  
CTCSS Frequency  
•
This frequency and mode will be used for  
transmitting.  
Tone/ CTCSS ON/ OFF  
Status  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
3 Press [A/B (A=B)] to select the other VFO.  
4 Select the reception frequency and mode.  
5 Press [SPLIT].  
Memory Name  
Memory Channel Lockout  
ON/ OFF  
Yes1  
Yes1  
1 Changing the data after recalling a memory channel overwrites  
•
“
” appears.  
the contents of the channel.  
6725,1*ꢀ'$7$ꢀ,1ꢀ0(025<  
There are 2 methods used for storing transmission/  
reception frequencies and associated data in memory  
channels 00 to 99. Use either method, depending  
on the relationship of the reception and transmission  
frequencies you store:  
6 Press [M.IN] to enter Memory Scroll mode.  
•
Simplex channels:  
RX frequency = TX frequency  
•
To exit Memory Scroll mode and abort the  
storage process, press [CLR].  
•
Split-frequency channels:  
5;ꢀIUHTXHQF\ꢀꢀ7;ꢀIUHTXHQF\  
7 Turn the MULTI/CH control, or press Mic [UP]/  
[DWN] to select a memory channel.  
Memory channels P0 to P9 can also be used as  
simplex channels.  
Note: When RIT or XIT is ON, the frequency that includes the  
RIT or XIT offset will be stored.  
•
You can also select a channel by entering  
a 2-digit number, such as 12, using the  
numeric keys. Press [ENT], [1.8 (1)], [3.5  
(2)] for example.  
Qꢀ 6LPSOH[ꢀ&KDQQHOV  
1 Press [A/B (A=B)] to select VFO A or VFO B.  
•
“
” or “  
” appears to show which VFO  
8 Press [M.IN] to store the data.  
is selected.  
•
The previous data stored in the channel is  
overwritten.  
2 Select the frequency, mode, etc., to be stored.  
Note: When subtone frequencies differ between TX and RX  
while performing memory-VFO split operation, the subtone  
frequency for TX will be stored in the memory channel.  
3 Press [M.IN] to enter Memory Scroll mode.  
•
“
” appears.  
41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ꢁꢎꢀꢀ0(025<ꢀ)($785(6  
Qꢀ 7HPSRUDU\ꢀ)UHTXHQF\ꢀ&KDQJHV  
0(025<ꢀ5(&$//ꢀ$1'ꢀ6&52//  
After retrieving frequencies and associated data in  
Memory Recall mode, you can temporarily change  
the data without overwriting the contents of the  
memory channel.  
There are 2 modes which allow you to retrieve  
frequencies and associated data that you stored in a  
memory channel: Memory Recall and Memory Scroll.  
Qꢀ 0HPRU\ꢀ5HFDOO  
1 Access Menu No. 18 and select “on”.  
In this mode, the transceiver receives and  
transmits using a frequency that you retrieve.  
You can temporarily change the frequency and  
associated data without overwriting the contents  
of the memory channel when Menu No. 18 is ON  
(default is OFF).  
•
Skip this step when changing only the  
associated data (not the frequency).  
2 Recall a memory channel.  
3 Change the frequencies and associated data.  
•
Use only the Tuning control to select a  
frequency.  
1 Press [M/V] to enter Memory Recall mode.  
•
The memory channel that was last selected  
appears.  
4 If necessary, for future use, store the changed  
data in another memory channel. Refer to  
“Channel ° Channel Transfer” {below}.  
Note: If Menu No. 18 is set to “on”, the frequency of the  
memory channel can be changed.  
2 Turn the MULTI/CH control, or press Mic [UP]/  
0(025<ꢀ75$16)(5  
[DWN] to select a memory channel.  
•
Continuously holding down Mic [UP]/ [DWN]  
steps the transceiver through the memory  
channels until the key is released.  
Qꢀ 0HPRU\ꢀ°ꢀ9)2ꢀ7UDQVIHU  
After retrieving frequencies and associated data  
from Memory Recall mode, you can copy the data  
to the VFO. This function is useful, for example,  
when the frequency you want to monitor is near the  
frequency stored in a memory channel.  
•
•
Memory channels which contain no data are  
skipped.  
You cannot change memory channels while  
transmitting.  
1 Recall the desired memory channel.  
3 To exit Memory Recall mode, press [M/V].  
Note: If Menu No. 18 is set to “on”, the frequency of the  
memory channel can be changed.  
2 Press [M>V].  
•
When a simplex channel is recalled, the data  
is copied to VFO A or VFO B, depending on  
which VFO was used to recall the channel.  
Qꢀ 0HPRU\ꢀ6FUROO  
•
When a split channel is recalled, the RX  
data is copied to VFO A and the TX data is  
copied to VFO B.  
Use this mode to check the contents of the  
memory channels without changing the current  
reception frequency. In this mode, frequencies you  
retrieve are not used for receiving and transmitting.  
Note: Pressing [M>V] after temporarily changing the  
retrieved data copies the new data to the VFO.  
1 Press [M.IN] to enter Memory Scroll mode.  
Qꢀ &KDQQHOꢀ°ꢀ&KDQQHOꢀ7UDQVIHU  
•
The memory channel that was last selected  
appears.  
You can also copy channel information from one  
memory channel to another. This function is useful  
when storing frequencies and associated data that  
you temporarily change in Memory Recall mode.  
1 Recall the desired memory channel.  
2 Turn the MULTI/CH control, or press Mic [UP]/  
[DWN] to step through the memory channels.  
2 Press [M.IN] to enter Memory Scroll mode.  
•
You can also change channels by entering  
a 2-digit number. Press [ENT], [24 (8)], [28  
(9)] for example.  
•
To exit Memory Scroll mode, press [CLR].  
3 Select the memory channel where you would  
like the data copied, using the MULTI/CH  
control.  
3 To exit Memory Scroll mode, press [CLR].  
•
The transceiver re-displays the memory  
channel or VFO frequency that was selected  
before you activated Memory Scroll.  
4 Press [M.IN].  
Note: Do not press [M.IN] again after entering Memory  
Scroll mode. Pressing [M.IN] results in over-writing the  
current VFO data to the memory channel you selected.  
42  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ꢁꢎꢀꢀ0(025<ꢀ)($785(6  
Channel 00 ~ 99  
RX frequency  
TX frequency  
°
°
°
°
°
°
°
Channel 00 ~ 99  
RX frequency  
TX frequency  
Channel P0 ~ P9  
TX/RX frequency  
Start frequency  
End frequency  
°
°
°
°
°
°
°
Channel P0 ~ P9  
TX/RX frequency  
Start frequency  
End frequency  
Mode for RX  
Mode for RX  
Mode for TX  
Mode for TX  
Mode for TX/RX  
Tone frequency  
CTCSS frequency  
Mode for TX/RX  
Tone frequency  
CTCSS frequency  
Tone frequency  
CTCSS frequency  
Tone frequency  
CTCSS frequency  
Tone/ CTCSS  
Tone/ CTCSS  
Tone/ CTCSS  
Tone/ CTCSS  
°
°
°
°
°
°
ON/ OFF status  
ON/ OFF status  
ON/ OFF status  
ON/ OFF status  
Memory Name  
Memory Name  
Memory Name  
Memory Name  
Memory Channel  
Lockout ON/ OFF  
Memory Channel  
Lockout ON/ OFF  
Memory Channel  
Lockout ON/ OFF  
Memory Channel  
Lockout ON/ OFF  
Channel 00 ~ 99  
RX frequency  
Start frequency  
End frequency  
Mode for RX  
°
°
°
°
°
°
°
°
°
Channel P0 ~ P9  
Note: After copying, the Memory Channel Lockout turns OFF.  
TX/RX frequency  
6725,1*ꢀ)5(48(1&<ꢀ5$1*(6  
––  
Memory channels P0 to P9 allow you to store  
frequency ranges for VFO tuning and Program Scan.  
Program Scan is described in the next chapter. To  
tune or scan frequencies within a specified range,  
store the start and end frequencies for that range in  
advance.  
––  
Mode for TX/RX  
––  
TX frequency  
Mode for TX  
––  
Tone frequency  
CTCSS frequency  
Tone frequency  
CTCSS frequency  
1 Press [A/B (A=B)] to select VFO A or VFO B.  
2 Select the desired start frequency.  
Tone/ CTCSS  
Tone/ CTCSS  
3 Press [M.IN] to enter Memory Scroll mode.  
°
°
°
ON/ OFF status  
ON/ OFF status  
•
To exit Memory Scroll mode and abort the  
storage process, press [CLR].  
Memory Name  
Memory Name  
Memory Channel  
Lockout ON/ OFF  
Memory Channel  
Lockout ON/ OFF  
4 Turn the MULTI/CH control, or press Mic [UP]/  
[DWN] to select a memory channel in the range of  
P0 to P9.  
Channel P0 ~ P9  
TX/RX frequency  
°
°
°
°
°
°
°
°
°
Channel 00 ~ 99  
RX frequency  
TX frequency  
Mode for RX  
Mode for TX  
––  
5 Press [M.IN] to store the start frequency in the  
Mode for TX/RX  
memory channel.  
•
“ENDINPUT” appears on the sub-display.  
Start frequency  
End frequency  
Tone frequency  
CTCSS frequency  
––  
Tone frequency  
CTCSS frequency  
6 Turn the Tuning control or MULTI/CH control to  
select the end frequency.  
Tone/ CTCSS  
Tone/ CTCSS  
°
°
°
ON/ OFF status  
ON/ OFF status  
7 Press [M.IN] to store the end frequency in the  
memory channel.  
Memory Name  
Memory Name  
•
The previous data stored in the channel is  
overwritten.  
Memory Channel  
Lockout ON/ OFF  
Memory Channel  
Lockout ON/ OFF  
43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ꢁꢎꢀꢀ0(025<ꢀ)($785(6  
Qꢀ &RQILUPLQJꢀ6WDUWꢆꢀ(QGꢀ)UHTXHQFLHV  
(5$6,1*ꢀ0(025<ꢀ&+$11(/6  
Use this procedure to check the start and end  
frequencies that you stored in channels P0 to P9.  
If there are memory channels that you will not recall  
in the future, you may prefer erasing the contents of  
those channels.  
1 Press [M>V] to enter Memory Recall mode.  
1 Press [M/V] to enter Memory Recall mode.  
2 Turn the MULTI/CH control or press Mic [UP]/  
[DWN] to select a memory channel from P0 to  
P9.  
2 Turn the MULTI/CH control or press Mic [UP]/  
[DWN] to select the desired memory channel.  
•
You can also select a channel by entering a  
2-digit number. Press [ENT], [7 (3)], [10 (4)]  
for example.  
3 Press [A/B (A=B)] to check the start frequency,  
then press [A/B (A=B)] again to check the end  
frequency.  
3 Press and hold [CLR].  
Qꢀ 3URJUDPPDEOHꢀ9)2  
•
A long beep sounds to confirm that the channel  
data has been erased.  
Using the start and end frequencies that you stored  
in channels P0 to P9, Programmable VFO restricts  
the frequency range that you can tune with the  
Tuning control. One application of this function is  
to help you operate within the authorized frequency  
limits of your license.  
0(025<ꢀ&+$11(/ꢀ1$0(  
You can assign a name to each memory channel, with  
a maximum of 8 alpha-numeric characters.  
Note: You cannot name the Quick Memory channels.  
1 Press [M>V] to enter Memory Recall mode.  
1 Press [M/V] to enter Memory Recall mode.  
2 Turn the MULTI/CH control or press Mic [UP]/  
[DWN] to select a memory channel from P0 to  
P9.  
2 Turn the MULTI/CH control or press Mic [UP]/  
[DWN] to select a memory channel.  
You can now only tune from the start frequency to  
the end frequency, using the Tuning control.  
3 Press [Q-MR].  
4 Turn the MULTI/CH control to select the desired  
alpha-numeric character. You can move the  
cursor to the left by pressing [Q-M.IN], or to the  
right by pressing [Q-MR]. Press [CL] to erase the  
character at the cursor.  
Note: Pressing Mic [UP]/ [DWN] or turning the MULTI/CH  
control changes the memory channel number while in  
Programmable VFO mode.  
0(025<ꢀ&+$11(/ꢀ/2&.287  
5 After selecting all the necessary characters for the  
memory channel name, press [MENU] to store the  
name.  
You can lock out memory channels that you prefer  
not to monitor during Memory Scan. Memory Scan is  
described in the next chapter {page 48}.  
6 When you recall a memory channel with a name,  
the name is displayed on the sub-display along  
with the memory channel number.  
1 Press [M/V] to enter Memory Recall mode.  
2 Turn the MULTI/CH control or press Mic [UP]/  
[DWN] to select the desired memory channel.  
3 Press [CLR].  
48,&.ꢀ0(025<  
•
Do not hold down the [CLR] key. Holding  
[CLR] for more than approximately 2 seconds  
will erase the contents of the memory channel.  
Quick Memory is designed to quickly and temporarily  
save data without specifying a particular memory  
channel. Use Quick Memory to store data you will not  
use in future operating sessions. For example, as you  
tune across the band looking for DX, it is convenient  
to store stations that you want to contact. You can  
quickly jump between several different memory  
channels as you monitor them.  
•
A dot appears beside the right-most digit of  
the memory channel number to indicate the  
channel has been locked out.  
Quick Memory channels can store the following data:  
•
Repeatedly pressing [CLR] toggles between  
adding and removing the channel from the scan  
list.  
VFO A frequency and  
operating mode  
VFO B frequency and  
operating mode  
RIT ON/ OFF  
XIT ON/ OFF  
RIT/ XIT offset frequency FINE ON/ OFF  
Noise Blanker ON/ OFF DSP Beat Cancel  
OFF/ 1/ 2  
DSP Noise Reduction  
OFF/ 1/ 2  
IF Notch  
DSP filter bandwidth  
Simplex/ Split  
44  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ꢁꢎꢀꢀ0(025<ꢀ)($785(6  
5(&$//,1*ꢀ48,&.ꢀ0(025<ꢀ&+$11(/6  
180%(5ꢀ2)ꢀ48,&.ꢀ0(025<ꢀ&+$11(/6  
This transceiver provides up to 10 Quick Memory  
channels. You can adjust the number of available  
channels by accessing Menu No. 17 and selecting “3”,  
“5” (default), or “10”.  
You can recall a Quick Memory channel only when  
you operate the transceiver in VFO mode.  
1 Press [Q-MR].  
•
•
The current memory channel number appears.  
6725,1*ꢀ,172ꢀ48,&.ꢀ0(025<  
If there is no data stored in any Quick Memory  
channel, the data cannot be recalled to the  
current VFO; an error beep sounds.  
Each time you store a new frequency, all previously  
stored frequencies are bumped to the next respective  
Quick Memory channel. When all 10 memory  
channels contain frequencies, storing one more  
frequency bumps the contents of memory channel 9  
off the stack (the data is lost).  
2 Turn the MULTI/CH control to select a Quick  
Memory channel.  
•
You cannot change memory channels while  
transmitting.  
The following diagram illustrates how the Quick  
Memory stacks the data in memory each time you  
press [Q-M.IN].  
3 To exit, press [Q-MR] again.  
Note: Memory channels cannot be changed while using the  
TF-SET function.  
New data  
24.911  
14.005  
14.235  
14.250  
18.111  
7(0325$5<ꢀ)5(48(1&<ꢀ&+$1*(6  
Memory 0 Memory 1 Memory 2 Memory 3 Memory 4  
After recalling a Quick Memory channel, you can  
temporarily change the data without overwriting  
the contents of the channel. You can change the  
frequency even when you select “oFF” in Menu  
No. 18.  
50.015  
7.082  
29.610  
3.545  
14.195  
Memory 5 Memory 6 Memory 7 Memory 8 Memory 9  
New data  
21.005  
24.911  
14.005  
14.235  
14.250  
Memory 0 Memory 1 Memory 2 Memory 3 Memory 4  
1 Press [Q-MR].  
18.111  
50.015  
7.082  
29.610  
3.545  
2 Turn the MULTI/CH control to select a Quick  
Memory 5 Memory 6 Memory 7 Memory 8 Memory 9  
Memory channel.  
New data  
3 Change the frequencies and associated data.  
14.085  
21.005  
24.911  
14.005  
14.235  
4 To store the changed data in the Quick Memory,  
Memory 0 Memory 1 Memory 2 Memory 3 Memory 4  
press [Q-M.IN].  
14.250  
18.111  
50.015  
7.082  
29.610  
•
This action stores the new data in the current  
channel and bumps the old frequency to the  
next higher Quick Memory channel.  
Memory 5 Memory 6 Memory 7 Memory 8 Memory 9  
You can store data in the Quick Memory only when  
you operate the transceiver in VFO mode.  
5 To exit, press [Q-MR] again.  
Note: Memory channel data can also be changed while using  
the TF-SET function.  
1 Select the frequency, mode, etc., on the  
transceiver VFO.  
2 Press [Q-M.IN].  
48,&.ꢀ0(025<ꢀ°ꢀ9)2ꢀ75$16)(5  
This function copies the contents of the recalled  
memory channel to the VFO.  
•
Each time you press [Q-M.IN], the current VFO  
data is written to the Quick Memory.  
Note: When RIT or XIT is ON, the ON status and the offset will  
also be stored.  
1 Recall a Quick Memory channel.  
2 Press [M>V].  
Note: Pressing [M>V] after temporarily changing the recalled  
data copies the new data to the VFO.  
(5$6,1*ꢀ48,&.ꢀ0(025<ꢀ&+$11(/6  
1 Recall a Quick Memory channel.  
2 Press and hold [CLR].  
•
A confirmation message appears on the  
display.  
3 Press [CLR].  
The channel data has been erased.  
•
45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6&$1  
Scan is a useful function for hands-off monitoring of  
your favorite frequencies. By becoming comfortable  
with all types of Scan, you will increase your operating  
efficiency.  
If one or more Program Scan frequency ranges are  
programmed in P.SCAN–P0 to P9 (Memory channel  
numbers P0 ~ P9 in other words):  
1 Press and hold [SCAN (SG.SEL)] in VFO mode.  
This transceiver provides the following types of scans:  
•
“P.SCAN–Pn” appears on the sub-display  
(where n represents a number from 0 to 9).  
Scan Type  
Purpose  
2 Turn the MULTI/CH control to select the Program  
Scan memory (P.SCAN–P0 to P.SCAN–P9). As  
you select the channel, “on” or “oFF” appears  
on the frequency display. “on” signifies that the  
selected P.SCAN is active for the Program Scan  
and “oFF” signifies that the selected P.SCAN is  
inactive for the Program Scan.  
Scans the entire frequency  
range of the transceiver.  
VFO Scan  
Normal  
Scans the specific frequency  
ranges stored in Memory  
channels P0 ~ P9.  
Scan  
Program  
Scan  
All-Channel Scans all Memory channels,  
Scan  
from 00 ~ 99 and P0 ~ P9  
Memory  
Scan  
Scans the specific Memory  
channel groups.  
Group Scan  
Scans the Quick Memory  
channels.  
Configure all P.SCAN channels (P.SCAN–P0 ~  
P.SCAN–P9) as “oFF” by pressing [SCAN (SG.  
SEL)].  
Quick Memory Scan  
Note:  
X
While using CTCSS in FM mode, Scan stops only for the  
signals that contain the same CTCSS tone that you selected.  
X
Pressing Mic [PTT] causes Scan to stop.  
3 Press [SCAN (SG.SEL)] or [CLR] to return to the  
current VFO mode.  
1250$/ꢀ6&$1  
4 Press [SCAN (SG.SEL)] to start the VFO Scan.  
While operating the transceiver in VFO mode, 2 types  
of scanning are available.  
5 Press [SCAN (SG.SEL)] or [CLR] to stop the VFO  
Scan.  
•
VFO Scan  
Note:  
X
While scanning, you can change the scan speed by  
turning the RIT/ XIT control. Turn the control clockwise/  
counterclockwise to decrease/ increase the scan speed.  
The speed indicator appears on the sub-display, where P1 is  
the fastest speed and P9 is the slowest.  
The transceiver scans the entire frequency  
range of the transceiver. For example, if you are  
operating and receiving on the transceiver’s  
VFO A at 14.195.00 MHz, it scans all the  
frequencies in the range of 30.00 kHz to  
59.999.99 MHz. (Refer to the available VFO  
frequency range in the specifications.)  
X
You cannot change the VFO Scan speed in FM mode.  
352*5$0ꢀ6&$1  
•
Program Scan  
Program Scan monitors the range between the start  
and end frequencies that you have stored in Memory  
channels P0 ~ P9 (P.SCAN–P0 ~ P9). Refer to  
“STORING FREQUENCY RANGES” {page 43} for  
details on how to store the start and end frequencies  
to these Memory channels.  
By programming the start and end frequency  
in Memory channels P0 ~ P9, you can limit the  
scanning frequency range. Since there are  
10 memory channels (P0 ~ P9) available for  
specifying the start and end frequencies, you can  
select 1 or more (a maximum of 10) ranges to  
scan. This is useful when you are waiting for a DX  
station on a certain frequency but the station may  
appear on a slightly higher or lower frequency.  
You can select a maximum of 10 memory channels  
(P.SCAN-P0 to P9) and sequentially scan the  
frequency ranges that you stored in these channels.  
If the current VFO frequency falls within the selected  
P.SCAN frequency range, Program Scan starts from  
the P.SCAN number and then continues to scan  
the next larger P.SCAN number. If the current VFO  
frequency is outside all of the P.SCAN frequency  
ranges, Program Scan starts from the smallest  
P.SCAN number that is selected as “on” (each  
P.SCAN can be set to either “on” or “oFF”).  
9)2ꢀ6&$1  
VFO Scan scans the entire frequency range that is  
available for the current VFO. When the Program  
Scan frequency range is not programmed or no  
Scan Group is selected for the Program Scan, the  
transceiver also scans the entire frequency range  
available for the current VFO.  
Note: At least one of the valid Program Scan channels (from P0  
to P9) must be programmed and selected to perform Program  
Scan. If no P.SCAN (memory channel P0 ~ P9) is selected for  
Program Scan, the transceiver performs VFO Scan {above}.  
The memory channel numbers P0 ~ P9 have alias  
names, “P.SCAN”. “P.SCAN–P0” represents channel  
P0, “P.SCAN–P1” represents channel P1,  
“P.SCAN–P2” represents channel P2, and so on up to  
“P.SCAN–P9” which represents channel P9.  
1 Press [A/B (A=B)] to select VFO A or VFO B.  
2 Press and hold [SCAN (SG.SEL)].  
46  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ꢁꢁꢀꢀ6&$1  
352*5$0ꢀ6&$1ꢀ3$57,$//<ꢀ6/2:('  
You can specify a maximum of 5 frequency points for  
each memory channel from P0 to P9 so that Program  
Scan slows down the scanning speed. To specify the  
slow down frequency points, first program the start  
and end frequencies into a memory channel (P0 ~ P9).  
3 Turn the MULTI/CH control or press Mic [UP]/  
[DWN] to select the memory channel (P.SCAN–P0  
to P.SCAN–P9). As you select the Memory  
Channel, “on” or “oFF” appears on the main  
frequency display. “on” signifies that the memory  
channel is active for the Program Scan and “oFF”  
signifies that the memory channel group is inactive  
for the Program Scan.  
1 Access Menu No. 19 to confirm that the function is  
ON (default is ON).  
2 You can further configure the slow down frequency  
width. Access Menu No. 20 to select the range  
from 100 Hz to 500 Hz (default is 300 Hz).  
4 To activate the Program Scan frequency range,  
select the desired P.SCAN number by turning the  
MULTI/CH control. Then, press [M.IN] to select  
“on” for the P.SCAN (channel). When a channel is  
activated for Program Scan, “on” appears on the  
display.  
Note: If you select, for example, 500 Hz for Menu No. 20,  
the Program Scan slows down to a 500 Hz width, centering  
the frequency you marked below.  
3 Press and hold [M/V], then turn the MULTI/CH  
control to recall the memory channel (P0 ~ P9)  
for which you want to specify the scan slow down  
frequencies.  
4 Turn the Tuning control to the center frequency  
point that you want the Program Scan to slow  
down. Then, press [Q-M.IN] to mark the slow  
down frequency point.  
5 Press [SCAN (SG.SEL)] or [CLR] to return to the  
current VFO mode.  
•
“ ” appears.  
6 Press [SCAN (SG.SEL)] to start the Program  
Scan.  
5 Repeat step 4 to specify the center slow down  
frequency points.  
•
To quickly move toward a desired frequency  
while scanning, turn the Tuning control or the  
MULTI/CH control, or press Mic [UP]/ [DWN].  
•
You can specify a maximum of 5 frequency  
points for each channel.  
•
Turning the RIT/ XIT control clockwise  
decreases the scan speed and  
counterclockwise increases the speed, except  
while in FM mode. The current scan speed is  
shown on the display; P1 is the fastest speed  
and P9 is the slowest.  
6 If you want to clear a slow down frequency point  
that you previously stored, select the frequency  
that you stored, then press [Q-M.IN] at this  
frequency spot where “ ” appears.  
•
A confirmation beep sounds and “ ”  
disappears.  
•
While in FM mode, Scan automatically stops  
on a frequency where a signal is present. The  
transceiver will either remain on that channel  
for a short time (Time-Operated mode) or until  
the signal drops out (Carrier-Operated mode),  
depending on which mode you select via Menu  
No. 22 {page 48}.  
•
To clear all slow down frequency points, press  
and hold [Q-M.IN].  
7 Press [A/B (A=B)] to return to VFO mode.  
8 Press [SCAN (SG.SEL)] to start the Program Scan  
with the slow down frequency point(s).  
Note:  
7 To stop Scan, press [SCAN (SG.SEL)] or [CLR].  
Note:  
X
During Program Scan, you can turn the RIT/ XIT control  
to adjust the scanning speed. Turn the control clockwise/  
counterclockwise to slow down/ speed up the scan. The  
Program Scan speed indicator appears on the main display  
during Program Scan; P1 is the fastest speed and P9 is the  
slowest.  
X
If you have turned the SQL control clockwise, far beyond the  
squelch threshold while in FM mode, Scan may fail to stop  
at a channel where a signal is present. If this happens, turn  
the SQL control slightly counterclockwise.  
If you press [SCAN (SG.SEL)] before storing any frequency  
range for memory channels P0 to P9, the transceiver starts  
VFO scan.  
When the current receive frequency is within one of the  
ranges that you selected with channel numbers, Scan starts  
with the current frequency. The operating mode stored in  
the memory channel is used.  
X
X
You cannot change the Program Scan speed in FM mode.  
Although you can specify the Program Scan slow down  
frequency point in FM mode, it does not function.  
X
X
X
When copying a Program Memory Channel, all frequency  
points are cleared.  
X
X
The operating mode can be changed while scanning, but the  
memory channel will be overwritten with the changed mode.  
When the current Scan range is smaller than a single step of  
the MULTI/CH control, turning the control clockwise causes  
Scan to jump to the start frequency, and counterclockwise to  
the end frequency.  
X
X
Starting Program Scan switches OFF the RIT and XIT  
functions.  
While in FM mode, Program Scan monitors rounded off  
frequencies regardless of the Menu No. 12 setting.  
47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ꢁꢁꢀꢀ6&$1  
6&$1ꢀ+2/'  
$//ꢈ&+$11(/ꢀ6&$1  
This function stops Program Scan for approximately  
5 seconds, then resumes Scan when you jump to the  
desired frequency by turning the Tuning control or the  
MULTI/CH control, or by pressing Mic [UP]/ [DWN].  
Use the following procedure to scan all the memory  
channels that contain frequency data in sequence,  
ignoring the Memory Group number.  
1 Select Time-Operated or Carrier-Operated mode  
To use this function, access Menu No. 21, and select  
“on”. The default is OFF.  
via Menu No. 22.  
2 Press [M/V] to enter Memory Recall mode.  
3 Turn the SQL control to adjust the squelch  
threshold to mute the speaker.  
0(025<ꢀ6&$1  
4 Press and hold [SCAN (SG.SEL)] to enter Scan  
Memory Scan monitors all memory channels in which  
you have stored frequencies (All-channel Scan) or only  
a desired group of memory channels (Group Scan).  
Group Select mode.  
•
•
Turn the MULTI/CH control to select the  
Memory channel group.  
Scan automatically stops at a channel where a signal  
is present, regardless of the operating mode. The  
transceiver will either remain on that channel for a  
short time (Time-Operated mode) or until the signal  
drops out (Carrier-Operated mode). Use Menu No.  
22 to select the mode. The default is “to” (Time-  
Operated).  
MGROUP–0 represents Memory channels  
0 ~ 9, MGROUP–1 represents Memory  
channels 10 ~ 19 and so on up to MGROUP–9  
which represents Memory channels 90 ~ 99  
and MGROUP-P which represents Memory  
channels P0 ~ P9.  
5 As you select the Memory Groups using the  
MULTI/CH control, press [SCAN (SG.SEL)] to  
select “oFF” for all Memory Groups.  
6&$1ꢀ5(680(  
The transceiver stops scanning at the frequency  
(or memory channel) where a signal is detected. It  
then continues scanning according to which resume  
mode you have selected. You can choose one of the  
following modes. The default is Time-Operated mode.  
6 Press [SCAN (SG.SEL)] to return to Memory  
Recall mode.  
7 Press [SCAN (SG.SEL)] to start All-channel Scan.  
•
Scan starts from the current memory channel  
and ascends up through the channel numbers.  
(The scan direction cannot be changed.)  
•
Time-Operated mode (“to”)  
The transceiver remains on a busy frequency (or  
memory channel) for approximately 6 seconds,  
then continues to scan, even if the signal is still  
present.  
•
To jump to a desired channel while scanning,  
turn the MULTI/CH control, or press Mic [UP]/  
[DWN].  
•
Carrier-Operated mode (“co”)  
8 To stop Scan, press [SCAN (SG.SEL)] or [CLR].  
Note:  
The transceiver remains on the busy frequency (or  
memory channel) until the signal drops out. There  
is a 2 second delay between signal dropout and  
scan resumption.  
X
If you have turned the SQL control clockwise, far beyond the  
squelch threshold, Scan may fail to stop at a channel where  
a signal is present. If this happens, turn the SQL control  
slightly counterclockwise.  
X
Starting Memory Scan switches OFF the RIT and XIT  
functions.  
1 Press [MENU], then press [Q-M.IN]/ [Q-MR] or  
turn the MULTI/CH control to select Menu No. 22.  
2 Press [M.IN]/ [SCAN (SG.SEL)] to select “to”  
(Time-Operated) or “co” (Carrier-Operated).  
3 Press [MENU] to exit Menu mode.  
You can lock out the memory channels that you  
prefer not to monitor while scanning (refer to “Memory  
Channel Lockout”).  
48  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ꢁꢁꢀꢀ6&$1  
Qꢀ 3HUIRUPLQJꢀ*URXSꢀ6FDQ  
*5283ꢀ6&$1  
Group Scan starts with the smallest group number  
and repeats the sequence. For example, if you  
selected “on” for MGROUP–3, MGROUP–5, and  
MGROUP–7, the transceiver scans the channels  
in MGROUP–3 > MGROUP–5 > MGROUP–7 >  
MGROUP–3 and so on.  
110 memory channels are divided into 11 groups  
so that you can select one or more groups to be  
scanned, depending on the situation.  
Qꢀ 0HPRU\ꢀ*URXS  
When you store frequency data in a memory  
channel, the memory channel belongs to one of 11  
groups as shown below.  
1 Select Time-Operated or Carrier-Operated  
mode via Menu No. 22.  
2 Press [M/V] to enter Memory Recall mode.  
MGROUP-0 Memory Channel Nos. 00 ~ 09  
MGROUP-1 Memory Channel Nos. 10 ~ 19  
MGROUP-2 Memory Channel Nos. 20 ~ 29  
MGROUP-3 Memory Channel Nos. 30 ~ 39  
MGROUP-4 Memory Channel Nos. 40 ~ 49  
MGROUP-5 Memory Channel Nos. 50 ~ 59  
MGROUP-6 Memory Channel Nos. 60 ~ 69  
MGROUP-7 Memory Channel Nos. 70 ~ 79  
MGROUP-8 Memory Channel Nos. 80 ~ 89  
MGROUP-9 Memory Channel Nos. 90 ~ 99  
MGROUP-P Memory Channel Nos. P0 ~ P9  
3 Turn the SQL control to adjust the squelch  
threshold.  
4 Press [SCAN (SG.SEL] to start Memory Group  
Scan.  
•
Scan ascends up through the channel  
numbers. (The scan direction cannot be  
changed.)  
•
To jump to a desired channel while  
scanning, turn the MULTI/CH control or  
press and hold Mic [UP]/ [DWN].  
5 To stop Scan, press [SCAN (SG.SEL)] or  
[CLR].  
Note:  
X
If you have turned the SQL control clockwise, far beyond  
the squelch threshold, Scan may fail to stop at a channel  
in which a signal is present. If this happens, turn the  
SQL control slightly counterclockwise.  
When the current channel is within one of the groups  
that you selected, Scan starts with the current channel.  
When the current channel is outside all the groups that  
you selected, Scan starts with the group number that  
is larger than and closest to the group number of the  
current channel.  
Starting Memory Scan switches OFF the RIT and XIT  
functions.  
Qꢀ 6FDQꢀ*URXSꢀ6HOHFW  
You can select one or more groups to be scanned.  
First, select the groups to be scanned.  
X
X
1 Press [M/V] to enter Memory Recall mode.  
•
“
” appears.  
2 Press and hold [SCAN (SG.SEL)] to enter Scan  
Group Select mode.  
X
3 As you turn the MULTI/CH control, the  
MGROUP number on the sub-display changes.  
•
MGROUP–0 represents Memory channels  
0 ~ 9, MGROUP–1 represents Memory  
channels 10 ~ 19 and so on up to  
MGROUP–9 which represents Memory  
channels 90 ~ 99 and MGROUP-P which  
represents Memory channels P0 ~ P9.  
48,&.ꢀ0(025<ꢀ6&$1  
1 Press [Q-MR] to enter Quick Memory mode.  
2 Press [SCAN (SG.SEL] to start Quick Memory  
Scan.  
•
Scan starts from the current quick memory  
channel and ascends up through the channel  
numbers. (The scan direction cannot be  
changed.)  
4 Press [M.IN] to select “on” to add the group to  
the Group Scan list.  
•
If you do not want to scan the selected  
Group, press [SCAN (SG.SEL)] to select  
“oFF”.  
3 To stop Scan, press [SCAN (SG.SEL)] or [CLR].  
5 Press and hold [SCAN (SG.SEL)] or [CLR]. to  
exit the Scan Group Select mode.  
49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
23(5$725ꢀ&219(1,(1&(6  
Note:  
X
$17(11$6  
The APO function works even if the transceiver is scanning.  
X
The APO timer starts counting down when no key presses,  
no control adjustments, and no command (COM connector)  
sequences are detected.  
$17ꢀꢁꢆꢀ$17ꢀꢅ  
Two antenna connectors are available for the HF/  
50 MHz band on the TX/ RX unit rear panel.  
Press and hold [PRE (ANT 1/2)] to select ANT 1 or  
ANT 2.  
$8720$7,&ꢀ$17(11$ꢀ781(5  
As explained in “ANTENNA CONNECTION”  
{page 1}, matching the impedance of the coaxial cable  
and antenna is important. To adjust the impedance  
between the antenna and the transceiver, you have  
the choice of using the internal antenna tuner or an  
external antenna tuner. This section describes how  
to use the internal antenna tuner. For the external  
antenna tuner, consult the instruction manual that  
comes with the tuner.  
•
“
” or “  
” appears to indicate which  
antenna is selected.  
5;ꢀ$17  
Press and hold [ATT (RX ANT)] to toggle the RX ANT  
1 Select the transmit frequency.  
between enabled and disabled.  
2 Press and hold [PRE (ANT 1/2)] to select “  
or “ ”.  
”
•
“
” appears when the RX ANT is enabled.  
•
If the external antenna tuner (AT-300) is  
connected to the ANT 1 connector, select  
ANT 2 to use the internal antenna tuner.  
The internal antenna tuner is automatically  
bypassed if the external antenna tuner is  
connected to ANT 1.  
'59  
Press and hold [METER (DRV)] to switch the DRV  
between enabled and disabled.  
Use the standard input of 1 mW for the linear amplifier  
and other connections.  
3 Press and hold [AT (TUNE)].  
•
“
” appears when the DRV is enabled  
•
CW mode is automatically selected and tuning  
begins.  
The ANT 1, ANT 2, RX ANT, and DRV settings will  
automatically be stored in the antenna band memory.  
The next time you select the same band, the same  
antenna will be automatically selected.  
•
•
•
“
” blinks and the TX-RX LED lights red.  
To cancel tuning, press [AT (TUNE)] again.  
If the SWR of the antenna system is extremely  
high (more than 10:1), an alarm (“SWR” in  
Morse code) sounds and the internal antenna  
tuner is bypassed. Before attempting to tune  
again, adjust the antenna system to lower the  
SWR.  
Antenna Selection Frequency Range (MHz)  
0.03 ~ 0.522  
0.522 ~ 2.5  
2.5 ~ 4.1  
10.5 ~ 14.5  
14.5 ~ 18.5  
18.5 ~ 21.5  
21.5 ~ 25.5  
25.5 ~ 30.0  
30.0 ~ 60.0  
4.1 ~ 6.9  
4 Monitor the display and check that tuning has  
successfully finished.  
6.9 ~ 7.5  
•
•
If the tuning was successful, “  
” stops  
7.5 ~ 10.5  
blinking and the red TX-RX LED turns OFF.  
If tuning does not finish within approximately  
20 seconds, an alarm (“5” in Morse code)  
sounds. Press [AT (TUNE)] to stop the alarm  
and tuning.  
Note:  
X
Connect an external tuner to the ANT 1 connector only,  
then select ANT 1. The internal antenna tuner will be  
automatically bypassed when the transceiver is switched  
ON.  
•
•
If you want the transceiver to stay in  
transmission mode after the tuning completes,  
access Menu No. 51 and select “on”.  
X
The RX ANT can be used with less than 30 MHz.  
To pass received signals through the internal  
antenna tuner, access Menu No. 52 and select  
“on”. When this function is ON, “  
This may reduce interference on the receive  
frequency.  
$32ꢀꢂ$XWRꢀ3RZHUꢀ2))ꢃ  
You can set the transceiver to switch OFF  
automatically if no keys or controls are pressed or  
adjusted for a certain period of time. One minute  
before the transceiver switches OFF, “CHECK” is  
output in Morse code.  
” appears.  
1 Press [MENU], then press [Q-M.IN]/ [Q-MR] or  
turn the MULTI/CH control to access Menu No. 78.  
2 Press [M.IN]/ [SCAN (SG.SEL)] to select the APO  
time from “oFF”, “60”, “120”, or “180” minutes.  
3 Press [MENU] to exit Menu mode.  
50  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ꢁꢅꢀꢀ23(5$725ꢀ&219(1,(1&(6  
Note:  
$872ꢀ02'(  
You can configure a maximum of 32 frequency  
borders (VFO A and B) to change the operating mode  
automatically as you change the VFO frequency.  
X
X
X
X
X
The internal antenna tuner will not tune outside the available  
transmission frequency limits.  
Pressing [AT (TUNE)] for more than 1 second while  
transmitting interrupts transmitting and starts tuning.  
While using CW Full Break-in, the internal antenna tuner will  
be in-line for both transmission and reception.  
Tuning automatically turns OFF in approximately 60  
seconds. “AT” disappears and the error beeps stop.  
Tuning may still continue when the SWR meter indicates  
1:1. This happens due to the tuning algorithm; this is not a  
malfunction.  
As a default, the following modes are programmed on  
each operating band.  
0.03 MHz ~ 9.5 MHz: LSB  
9.5 MHz ~ 60 MHz: USB  
To add the frequency borders to the Auto Mode  
selection:  
X
X
Even though the SWR meter shows more than one segment,  
the internal antenna tuner may not re-tune. This happens  
because of an SWR calculation algorithm tolerance.  
If tuning does not finish even though the SWR meter  
indicates smaller than 3:1, adjust the antenna system to  
lower the SWR, then attempt to tune again.  
Tuning may not reach an SWR of 1:1, depending on the  
transceiver conditions.  
The AT-300 cannot perform tuning on the 50 MHz band.  
1 With the transceiver power OFF, press and hold  
[LSB/USB] + [ ] to turn the transceiver ON.  
•
“AUTOMODE” appears on the sub-display.  
X
X
2 Select an Auto Mode frequency memory channel  
number by turning the MULTI/CH control.  
•
Auto Memory channels 00 to 31 are available.  
35(6(77,1*  
3 Turn the Tuning control to select a desired  
frequency border (or enter the frequency with the  
keypad {page 28}) to change the operating mode.  
After each successful tuning session, the internal  
antenna tuner Preset memory function stores the  
position of the tuning capacitor in memory. The  
position of the capacitor is stored for each of the  
antenna tuner bands (see the following table) and for  
each antenna connector (ANT 1 and ANT 2).  
4 Press [LSB/USB], [CW/FSK (REV)], [FM/AM (FM-  
N)], or [DATA] until the desired communication  
mode appears.  
5 Repeat steps 2 ~ 4 until you have added all the  
Press [AT (TUNE)].  
data.  
•
“
” or “  
”appears, showing that the antenna  
tuner is in-line (not bypassed).  
6 Press [CLR] to exit the Auto Mode frequency  
configuration.  
•
Each time you go across the antenna tuner  
band, the internal antenna tuner Preset memory  
is automatically recalled to position the tuning  
capacitor without the need for retuning. If no  
preset data exists for a particular band/ antenna  
FRPELQDWLRQꢄꢀWKHQꢀWKHꢀGHIDXOWꢀGDWDꢀRIꢀꢂꢃꢀŸꢀLVꢀXVHGꢁ  
To activate the Auto Mode function:  
1 Press [MENU], then press [Q-M.IN]/ [Q-MR] or  
turn the MULTI/CH control to select Menu No. 23.  
2 Press [M.IN] to select “on”.  
Note: Tuning may restart in order to obtain the optimum  
matching condition even though the current antenna tuner band  
has the preset data.  
3 Press [MENU] to exit Menu mode.  
Note: When using Auto Mode Frequency configuration, you  
cannot use the manual frequency entry function.  
Internal Antenna Tuner Preset Frequency Range  
(MHz)  
0.03 ~ 1.85  
1.85 ~ 2.50  
2.50 ~ 3.525  
3.525 ~ 3.575  
3.575 ~ 3.725  
3.725 ~ 4.1  
4.1 ~ 6.9  
14.1 ~ 14.5  
14.5 ~ 18.5  
18.5 ~ 21.15  
21.15 ~ 21.5  
21.5 ~ 25.5  
25.5 ~ 29.0  
29.0 ~ 30.0  
30.0 ~ 51.0  
51.0 ~ 52.0  
52.0 ~ 53.0  
53.0 ~ 60.0  
6.9 ~ 7.05  
7.05 ~ 7.1  
7.1 ~ 7.5  
7.5 ~ 10.5  
10.5 ~ 14.1  
51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ꢁꢅꢀꢀ23(5$725ꢀ&219(1,(1&(6  
The table below is an example of setting the Auto  
Mode frequency.  
%((3ꢀ)81&7,21  
The Beep function provides you confirmation of entry,  
error status, and malfunctions of the transceiver.  
Channel Frequency  
Operation Range  
(MHz)  
Mode  
1.620 AM  
No.  
00  
01  
02  
03  
04  
05  
06  
07  
08  
09  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
30  
31  
(MHz)  
Although you can turn the beep function OFF by  
accessing Menu No. 03, we recommend you leave  
it ON in order to detect unexpected errors and  
malfunctions. You can also change the output level  
of the beeps by accessing Menu No. 03 and selecting  
“1” to “9”.  
0.030 ”ꢀIꢀꢎ 1.620  
1.620 ”ꢀIꢀꢎ 2.000  
2.000 ”ꢀIꢀꢎ 3.500  
3.500 ”ꢀIꢀꢎ 3.525  
3.525 ”ꢀIꢀꢎ 10.100  
10.100 ”ꢀIꢀꢎ 10.150  
2.000 CW  
3.500 LSB  
3.525 CW  
10.100 LSB  
10.150 CW  
The transceiver generates the following Morse code  
to tell you which mode is selected when you change  
operating modes:  
14.000 USB 10.150 ”ꢀIꢀꢎ 14.000  
Mode  
Morse Code Output  
14.070 CW-R 14.000 ”ꢀIꢀꢎ 14.070  
USB  
LSB  
CW  
FSK  
AM  
• • –  
(U)  
14.112 FSK  
18.068 USB 14.112 ”ꢀIꢀꢎ 18.068  
18.110 CW 18.068 ”ꢀIꢀꢎ 18.110  
21.000 USB 18.110 ”ꢀIꢀꢎ 21.000  
21.070 CW 21.000 ”ꢀIꢀꢎ 21.070  
21.125 FSK-R 21.070 ”ꢀIꢀꢎ 21.125  
21.150 CW 21.125 ”ꢀIꢀꢎ 21.150  
24.890 USB 21.150 ”ꢀIꢀꢎ 24.890  
24.930 CW 24.890 ”ꢀIꢀꢎ 24.930  
28.000 USB 24.930 ”ꢀIꢀꢎ 28.000  
14.070 ”ꢀIꢀꢎ 14.112  
• – • •  
(L)  
– • – •  
(C)  
• – •  
(R)  
• –  
(A)  
FM  
• • – •  
(F)  
USB-DATA  
LSB-DATA  
CW-R  
(UD)  
(LD)  
(CR)  
(RR)  
(FN)  
(FD)  
(FND)  
• • – – • •  
• – • • – • •  
– • – • • – •  
• – • • – •  
• • – • • –  
• • – • – • •  
• • – • – • – • •  
FSK-R  
FM-NAR  
28.070 CW  
28.150 FSK  
28.200 CW  
28.000 ”ꢀIꢀꢎ 28.070  
28.070 ”ꢀIꢀꢎ 28.150  
28.150 ”ꢀIꢀꢎ 28.200  
FM-DATA  
FM-NAR-DATA  
29.000 USB 28.200 ”ꢀIꢀꢎ 29.000  
30.000 FM-DATA 29.000 ”ꢀIꢀꢎ 30.000  
50.000 USB 30.000 ”ꢀIꢀꢎ 50.000  
The transceiver also generates the following warning,  
confirmation, and malfunction beeps.  
Beep Type  
Meaning  
50.100 CW  
50.000 ”ꢀIꢀꢎ 50.100  
Short, high pitch  
A valid key is pressed.  
51.000 USB 50.100 ”ꢀIꢀꢎ 51.000  
Double, high pitch A secondary function is selected.  
3 times, high pitch The third function is accepted.  
52.000 FM  
52.000 LSB  
52.000 LSB  
52.000 LSB  
52.000 LSB  
52.000 LSB  
51.000 ”ꢀIꢀꢎ 52.000  
A key entry is accepted, Scan  
Long, high pitch  
starts, or AT tune has completed.  
Short, regular  
A function is turned OFF.  
An invalid key is pressed.  
Short, low pitch  
The internal PLL circuit unlock  
status is detected.  
Morse “UL”  
Morse “S”  
•
•
The frequencies for channels 27 ~ 31 have not  
been configured, but because they are the same  
frequency as channel 26, they will be FM mode  
ꢂꢏꢁꢃꢀ0+]ꢀ”ꢀIꢀꢎꢀꢂꢈꢁꢃꢀ0+]ꢁ  
CW Auto Tune cannot complete,  
or an invalid frequency is entered.  
AT Tune cannot be completed  
within the specified time.  
Morse “5”  
Since the frequencies above 52.0 MHz have not  
been configured, they will be USB mode  
ꢂꢈꢁꢃꢀ0+]ꢀ”ꢀIꢀꢎꢀꢉꢃꢁꢃꢀ0+]  
The antenna’s SWR is too high  
(over 10:1) to perform AT tune.  
Morse “SWR”  
1 minute before the APO (Auto  
Power Off) function switches the  
transceiver OFF, a protection  
circuit is ON. or an invalid  
voltage is detected.  
Morse “CHECK”  
Waiting for a CW message to be  
recorded.  
Morse “BT”  
Morse “AR”  
The current message memory  
is full.  
52  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ꢁꢅꢀꢀ23(5$725ꢀ&219(1,(1&(6  
',63/$<  
Parameter  
Linear Amp. Control  
oFF  
All controls  
Disabled  
Enabled  
Disabled  
10 ms  
%5,*+71(66  
The brightness of the LCD display can be selected  
from OFF, and 1 to 6 .  
DC output (12 V)  
Relay  
1
2
3
TX delay  
1 Press [MENU], then press [Q-M.IN]/ [Q-MR] or  
DC output (12 V)  
Relay  
Enabled  
Enabled  
10 ms  
turn the MULTI/CH control to access Menu No. 00.  
2 Press [M.IN]/ [SCAN (SG.SEL)] to select “oFF”,  
“1”, “2”, “3”, “4”, “5”, or “6”.  
TX delay  
3 Press [MENU] to exit Menu mode.  
DC output (12 V)  
Relay  
Enabled  
Enabled  
25 ms  
%$&./,*+7ꢀ&2/25  
You can manually change the display illumination to  
suit the lighting conditions where you are operating.  
TX delay  
Note: If CW Full Break-in is enabled, 10 ms transmission delay  
is applied regardless of the settings in Menu Nos. 53 and 54.  
1 Press [MENU], then press [Q-M.IN]/ [Q-MR] or  
turn the MULTI/CH control to select Menu No. 01.  
2 Press [M.IN]/ [SCAN (SG.SEL)] to select “1”  
/2&.ꢀ)81&7,216  
(amber) or “2” (green).  
3 Press [MENU] to exit Menu mode.  
)5(48(1&<ꢀ/2&.ꢀ)81&7,21  
Frequency Lock disables some keys and controls to  
prevent you from accidentally activating a function or  
changing the current settings.  
3$1(/ꢀ.(<ꢀ'28%/(ꢀ)81&7,21ꢀ  
5(63216(ꢀ7,0(  
You can set the response time of double function  
panel keys to normal or fast. The default setting is  
normal.  
Press and hold [FINE (F.LOCK)] to turn the  
Frequency Lock function ON or OFF.  
•
“
” appears while this function is ON.  
1 Press [MENU], then press [Q-M.IN]/ [Q-MR] or  
turn the MULTI/CH control to select Menu No. 02.  
2 Press [M.IN]/ [SCAN (SG.SEL)] to select “1” (0.2  
The following keys and controls are disabled by  
Frequency Lock:  
second), “2” (0.5 second) or “3” (1 second)  
3 Press [MENU] to exit Menu mode.  
Key  
Comments  
Tuning control  
Still operates in TF-SET mode.  
/,1($5ꢀ$03/,),(5ꢀ&21752/  
When you connect an external HF or 50 MHz  
MULTI/CH  
control  
Still operates for changing setting  
modes.  
linear amplifier to the transceiver using the REMOTE  
connector, select “1”, “2”, or “3” to activate the internal  
relay and/ or DC output (12 V) so you can interface  
with the HF/ 50 MHz linear amplifier. The DC output  
(12 V) works without any annoying chattering sounds  
(“1”) but the output current is limited to 10 mA. If your  
linear amplifier control circuit draws more than DC 12  
V/ 10 mA, use relay switching (“2” or “3”) instead.  
[ENT]  
Still operates for character  
selection and for changing setting  
modes.  
[M.IN]  
Still operates for character  
selection and for changing setting  
modes. Also still operates for  
setting up scan groups (press  
and hold).  
[SCAN]  
Also, some linear amplifiers require a long  
transmission delay time because of the slow antenna  
relay switching time. In this case, select “3” for slow  
switching (25 ms delay).  
Still operates in TF-SET mode  
(in VFO mode) during Menu  
mode when the mic key paddle  
operation is ON.  
Mic [UP]  
1 Press [MENU], then press [Q-M.IN]/ [Q-MR] or  
turn the MULTI/CH control to select Menu No. 53  
(HF) or 54 (50 MHz).  
Still operates in TF-SET mode  
(in VFO mode) during Menu  
mode when the mic key paddle  
operation is ON.  
Mic [DWN]  
2 Press [M.IN]/ [SCAN (SG.SEL)] to select “oFF”,  
“1”, “2”, or “3”.  
3 Press [MENU] to exit Menu mode.  
[A/B]  
[M/V]  
[SPLIT]  
53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ꢁꢅꢀꢀ23(5$725ꢀ&219(1,(1&(6  
0,&523+21(ꢀ.(<6  
Key  
Band direct key  
[M>V]  
Comments  
There are 4 microphone PF (Programmable Function)  
keys: [PF1] , [PF2] , [PF3], and [PF4]. You can  
assign your own desired functions to these 4 keys  
via Menu Nos. 81 to 84. You can also reprogram the  
Mic [UP]/ [DWN] keys with your desired function by  
accessing Menu Nos. 85 and 86.  
[LSB/USB]  
[CW/FSK]  
Still operates to change between  
FM and FM Narrow (press and  
hold).  
Assign one of the following functions to each PF key.  
Selecting “OFF” assigns no function to the PF key.  
[FM/AM]  
[DATA]  
[MHz]  
No.  
Function  
Menu No.  
Remark  
00 ~ 87  
00 ~ 87  
RX ANT  
ANT1/2  
VOX LEVEL  
PROC LEVEL  
AT/TUNE  
CAR  
Still operates to cancel  
[FINE]  
[CWT]  
Frequency Lock (press and hold).  
100  
101  
102  
103  
104  
105  
106  
107  
108  
109  
110  
111  
112  
113  
114  
115  
116  
117  
118  
119  
120  
121  
122  
123  
124  
125  
126  
127  
128  
129  
130  
131  
132  
133  
134  
200  
201  
Still operates to turn AGC ON/  
OFF (press and hold).  
Still operates to turn Memory  
Channel Lockout ON/OFF. Also  
still operates to end a setting  
mode.  
[CLR]  
Possible press and hold  
Still operates to edit a Memory  
name.  
TX-MONI  
KEY DELAY  
DRV  
[Q-M.R]  
[Q-M.IN]  
Still operates to set or remove  
a Slow Scan Frequency point  
(press) or to remove all frequency  
points (press and hold).  
REV  
FM-N  
During Frequency Lock, the following functions which  
have been assigned to PF keys will not function:  
F.LOCK  
NB LEV  
NR LEV  
AUTO NOTCH  
NOTCH WIDE  
CH1  
Key  
Comments  
[M.IN]  
Still operates for setting up scan  
groups (press and hold).  
[SCAN]  
Possible press and hold  
Possible press and hold  
Possible press and hold  
Possible press and hold  
Possible press and hold  
[A/B]  
CH2  
[A=B]  
CH3  
[M/V]  
CH4  
[SPLIT]  
[M>V]  
[REV]  
[Q-M.R]  
[Q-M.IN]  
[CWT]  
RX  
A=B  
AGC SEL  
TONE SEL  
AGC OFF  
Q-MR  
Still operates in Menu mode and  
TF-SET mode (in VFO mode).  
[UP]  
Q-M.IN  
DRV  
Still operates in Menu mode and  
TF-SET mode (in VFO mode).  
[DOWN]  
SPLIT  
Mic [PF2] default  
[EMERGENCY]  
TF-SET  
A/B  
Mic [PF1] default  
SCAN  
Possible press and hold  
Mic [PF3] default  
352*5$00$%/(ꢀ)81&7,21ꢀ.(<6  
M>V  
75$16&(,9(5ꢀ)5217ꢀ3$1(/  
M.IN  
There are 2 PF (Programmable Function) keys on the  
transceiver front panel: [PF A] and [PF B]. You can  
assign your own desired functions to these 2 keys by  
accessing Menu Nos. 79 and 80.  
CW T.  
VOICE1  
VOICE2  
[PF A] default  
[PF B] default  
54  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ꢁꢅꢀꢀ23(5$725ꢀ&219(1,(1&(6  
5;ꢀ021,725  
RX monitor temporarily disables the squelch function  
to monitor the current frequency activities.  
No.  
Function  
VOICE3  
Remark  
The lower meter when  
transmitting  
202  
To use the RX Monitor function, first assign the  
function to a PF key (either on the front panel or the  
microphone).  
203  
204  
MONITOR  
TX TUNE  
Mic [PF4] default  
The input voice from  
the data terminal is  
transmitted  
1 Press [MENU], then press [Q-M.IN]/ [Q-MR] or  
turn the MULTI/CH control to select Menu No.  
79 ~ 86.  
205  
DATA SEND  
206  
207  
DOWN  
UP  
Mic [UP] default  
2 Press [M.IN]/ [SCAN (SG.SEL)] to select “203”.  
3 Press [MENU] to exit Menu mode.  
4 Press the assigned [PF] key.  
Mic [DWN]default  
Emergency frequency  
call (K type only)  
208  
EMERGENCY  
•
While pressing [PF], the speaker unmutes.  
OFF  
No function  
Note:  
7,0(ꢈ287ꢀ7,0(5  
The Time-out Timer limits the time of each  
transmission. It is also useful to prevent a long  
accidental transmission.  
X
Assigned key functions may not work, depending on the  
setting.  
X
[AGC SEL] can be used in modes other than FM mode,  
and can set a step level of the chosen AGC time constant  
(FAST/ SLOW).  
X
[TONE SEL] can also be used in FM mode while TONE or  
CTCSS is ON,  
1 Press [MENU], then press [Q-M.IN]/ [Q-MR] or  
turn the MULTI/CH control to access Menu No. 49.  
2 Press [M.IN]/ [SCAN (SG.SEL)] to select “oFF”,  
“3”, “5”, “10”, “20”, or “30” minutes.  
'63ꢀ5;ꢀ(48$/,=(5  
3 Press [MENU] to exit Menu mode.  
(48$/,=,1*ꢀ5(&(,9,1*ꢀ$8',2  
Use Menu No. 31 to change the receiver frequency  
responses of the target signal. You can select one  
from 8 different receiver profiles including the default  
flat response. Selecting any of the following items  
from the Menu causes “  
display.  
75$169(57(5  
If you have a transverter that converts the TS-590S  
operating frequencies to other frequencies, you can  
use this TS-590S transceiver as a transverter exciter.  
Consult the instruction manual that came with the  
transverter for interfacing to the TS-590S transceiver.  
” to appear on the  
•
Off (oFF):  
Slightly attenuates (1 kHz or higher audio  
frequencies).  
)5(48(1&<ꢀ',63/$<  
1 Connect the transverter to the ANT 1, ANT 2, RX  
•
•
High boost 1 (hb1):  
ANT, or DRV connector of the TS-590S.  
Emphasizes higher audio frequencies.  
2 Select the exciter operating frequency on the  
High boost 2 (hb2):  
transceiver.  
Emphasizes higher audio frequencies but lower  
audio frequency attenuation is less than High  
boost1 (hb1).  
•
The transverter will use this frequency as the  
reference for converting frequencies.  
•
Formant pass (FP):  
3 Press [MENU], then press [Q-M.IN]/ [Q-MR] or  
Improves clarity by suppressing audio frequencies  
outside the normal voice frequency range.  
turn the MULTI/CH control to access Menu No. 50.  
4 Press [M.IN]/ [SCAN (SG.SEL)] to select “1”.  
•
•
Bass boost 1 (bb1):  
Emphasizes lower audio frequencies.  
•
The output power is automatically set to the  
lowest power for that frequency (default). Refer  
to “TX POWER” {below}.  
Bass boost 2 (bb2):  
Emphasizes lower audio frequencies but higher  
audio frequency attenuation is less than Bass  
boost1 (bb1).  
5 Press [MENU] to exit Menu mode.  
6 Press [ENT], then set the target converting  
frequency using the numeric keys.  
•
•
Flat (FLAT):  
The flat frequency response.  
7 Press [ENT] to complete the entry.  
•
The transceiver displays the target transverter  
frequency instead of the actual operating  
frequency.  
User (U):  
Reserved for the ARCP software. Off is  
programmed at the factory as a default.  
55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ꢁꢅꢀꢀ23(5$725ꢀ&219(1,(1&(6  
Note:  
7;ꢀ781(  
X
When using a transverter, not all the functions of this  
transceiver are available.  
The TX Tune function allows you to adjust the  
antenna length, or tune the linear amplifier while  
transmitting a continuous CW signal.  
X
When turning the transverter ON, the frequency entry history  
is cleared, thus you cannot use the frequency entry history  
function.  
To use the TX Tune function, first assign the function  
to a PF key (either the front panel or Microphone PF  
keys).  
X
When using an antenna tuner in the IN state and the  
transverter is turned ON, the antenna tuner is forced to the  
THRU state.  
1 Press [MENU], then press [Q-M.IN]/ [Q-MR] or  
turn the MULTI/CH control to select a Menu No.  
from 79 to 86.  
75$160,66,21ꢀ287387ꢀ32:(5  
If Menu No. 50 is set to “1” {above}, the transceiver  
automatically decreases the output power to 5 watts.  
However, if you do not wish to decrease the output  
power, access Menu No. 50 and select “2”; the  
transceiver will transmit at full power.  
2 Press [M.IN]/ [SCAN (SG.SEL)] to select “204”.  
3 Press [MENU] to exit Menu mode.  
4 Press the assigned [PF] key.  
Note: You are responsible for your transmission output power  
settings.  
•
The transceiver automatically switches to CW  
mode, and transmits a continuous carrier.  
The transceiver selects the SWR meter function  
automatically.  
7;ꢀ021,725  
•
•
While in TX Tune mode, most keys are  
disabled.  
TX monitor allows you to monitor the on-going  
transmission sound. This is convenient when you  
want to check the modulation sound quality of the  
transmission. In FSK mode, you can monitor the FSK  
signal that the transceiver is transmitting.  
The default output power is configured as  
10 watts. However, you can adjust the output  
power using [PWR (TX MONI)] and the MULTI/  
CH control if necessary. The transceiver stores  
the new output power setting when you exit the  
TX Tune mode.  
1 Press and hold [PWR (TX MONI)].  
•
The current TX monitor setting appears on the  
sub-display.  
5 Press the assigned [PF] key again to exit the TX  
Tune mode.  
2 Turn the MULTI/CH control to select the monitor  
sound level from “oFF”, and “1” to “9”.  
3 Press [CLR] to store the selected TX monitor level.  
Note:  
48,&.ꢀ'$7$ꢀ75$16)(5  
This transceiver has the capability to quickly and  
conveniently transfer the reception frequency and  
mode to another compatible transceiver. Compatible  
transceivers include:  
X
We recommend you use headphones when you monitor  
SSB, AM, or FM mode, in order to avoid howling.  
The CW transmission signal cannot be monitored using  
the TX monitor function. Use the TX sidetone function to  
monitor CW transmissions (Menu Nos. 04 and 34).  
X
TS-590S  
TS-480HX/ SAT TS-2000/X  
TS-570S/ 570D TS-870S  
7;ꢀ32:(5  
Data transfer could be useful while contesting. A  
spotting station that is searching for new contest  
multipliers can quickly transfer a frequency over to the  
running (main) station.  
You can adjust the transmission output power by  
pressing [PWR (TX MONI)] and turning the MULTI/  
CH control. If more precise power adjustment is  
required, access Menu No. 48 and select “on”. When  
this function is activated, the power adjustment steps  
change as shown in the table below.  
6(77,1*ꢀ83  
Mode  
Menu No. 48 OFF Menu No. 48 ON  
Qꢀ (TXLSPHQWꢀ1HHGHG  
SSB/ CW/  
FM/ FSK  
5 ~ 100 W  
5 ~ 100 W  
In addition to a compatible transceiver, to transfer  
to a TS-590S, TS-480HX/ SAT, TS-2000/X,  
TS-570S/D, or TS-870S, you must have 1 cross-  
wired cable with a DB-9 female connector at both  
ends.  
in steps of 5  
in steps of 1  
5 ~ 25 W  
in steps of 5  
5 ~ 25 W  
in steps of 1  
AM  
Note: The output power settings are stored independently for  
HF and 50 MHz. As shown in the table above, you can also  
store different output power settings for AM and other modes for  
HF bands and the 50 MHz band.  
Qꢀ &RQQHFWLRQV  
For diagrams on how to connect the 2 transceivers,  
refer to “CONNECTING PERIPHERAL  
EQUIPMENT” {page 65}.  
56  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ꢁꢅꢀꢀ23(5$725ꢀ&219(1,(1&(6  
86,1*ꢀ48,&.ꢀ75$16)(5  
&20387(5ꢀ&21752/  
When connecting with another TS-590S,  
TS-480HX/ SAT, TS-2000/X, TS-570S/D/SG/DG, or  
TS-870S, use the same COM connector baud rate on  
each transceiver.  
By connecting this transceiver to a computer, you  
can change the computer into an electronic console  
from which you can remotely control functions of the  
transceiver. This capability makes remote operation  
of your transceiver possible from across the room,  
from another room, or when coupled with other  
commercially available products and where lawful,  
from another city, state, or country via an internet  
connection.  
Note: While transferring data, other functions may work slower.  
Qꢀ 7UDQVIHUULQJꢀ'DWD  
The TS-590S transceiver works as the Master,  
sending data to the Slave transceiver.  
6(77,1*ꢀ83  
1 Turn ON the Transfer function of each  
transceiver.  
Qꢀ (TXLSPHQWꢀ1HHGHG  
•
On the TS-590S, access Menu No. 58 and  
select “on”. For the compatible transceiver,  
refer to the instruction manual that came  
with the transceiver.  
When connecting the TS-590S to a PC USB port:  
•
•
•
•
USB 2.0 conformed (base) port  
Commercially available AB type USB 2.0 cable  
Transceiver control application  
2 On the Master, while in VFO mode, select an  
operating frequency and mode.  
Pre-installed virtual COM port driver, on the PC.  
(The driver is available at the website listed  
below.)  
3 On the Master, press [Q-M.IN].  
•
When using another TS-590S as the Slave,  
“PC” appears on the Slave.  
When connecting the TS-590S to a PC COM port:  
•
The displayed data is stored in Quick  
Memory channel 0 on the Master and  
transferred to the Slave.  
•
•
A PC equipped with a COM (serial) port  
1 straight cable. This cable must have a DB-9  
female connector at one end, and a DB-9 or a  
DB-25 female connector that mates with the  
COM port of your computer at the other end.  
Note: If the Master has RIT switched ON, the offset  
frequency is added to the reception frequency to be  
transferred.  
•
Transceiver control application  
Qꢀ 5HFHLYLQJꢀ'DWD  
To create your programs, access the Kenwood  
website and download the TS-590S command  
reference documents (pdf format) for details:  
The TS-590S transceiver works as the Slave,  
receiving data from the Master transceiver. The  
Slave can receive data using either Quick Memory  
channel 0 or the VFO.  
http://www.kenwood.com/i/products/info/amateur/software_download.html  
1 Switch ON the Transfer function of each  
Qꢀ &RQQHFWLRQV  
transceiver.  
To connect the transceiver to a computer, refer  
to the diagram in “CONNECTING PERIPHERAL  
EQUIPMENT” {page 65}.  
Note: Before connecting this transceiver to a computer,  
switch OFF the power to both the transceiver and the  
computer.  
•
On the TS-590S, access Menu No. 58 and  
select “on”. For the compatible transceiver,  
refer to the instruction manual that came  
with the transceiver.  
2 On the Slave, access Menu No. 59 and select  
either “oFF” (QUICK MEMO channel 0) or “on”  
(the VFO).  
&20081,&$7,21ꢀ3$5$0(7(56  
In order to control the transceiver with the computer,  
you must first choose the communication parameters.  
•
The default is OFF (QUICK MEMO).  
3 On the Master, perform the appropriate  
operation to send data.  
1 On the computer, configure your transceiver  
control application for 8 data bits, 1 stop bit, and  
no parity.  
•
For the correct method, refer to the  
instruction manual that came with the  
transceiver.  
2 On the transceiver, select the same transfer rate  
Note:  
via Menu No. 61 (COM port) or 62 (USB port).  
X
If you always use the TS-590S for receiving only,  
activate the TX Inhibit function via Menu No. 60, to avoid  
unintentional transmission.  
When the Slave receives data using the VFO  
programmed with a simplex frequency, the received data  
replaces the data on both VFOs. On the Slave, both RIT  
and XIT are set to OFF.  
•
The defaults are 9600 bps and 1 stop bit for  
Menu No. 61 and 115200 bps and 1 stop bit for  
Menu No. 62.  
X
•
Only a baud rate of 4800 bps uses 2 stop bits.  
X
When the Slave receives data using the VFOs  
programmed with split frequencies, the received data  
replaces the data only on the TX side of the VFO. On  
the Slave, XIT is set to OFF but RIT is not changed.  
57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ꢁꢅꢀꢀ23(5$725ꢀ&219(1,(1&(6  
(;7(51$/ꢀ$8',2ꢀ6(77,1*6  
software misdetects a busy signal, set Menu No.  
76 to “OPEN”.  
Qꢀ 6HOHFWLQJꢀDꢀ'DWDꢀ7UDQVPLVVLRQꢀ/LQH  
•
•
When not using the USB terminal, besides a serial  
cable, create and connect a sound input/output  
cable. In this case when connecting to sound  
equipment and the audio output level is too high,  
change the level setting in Menu No. 66.  
Depending on how you connect your transceiver  
to a PC, you will need to set a data transmission  
line type. Access Menu No. 63 and select “ACC2”  
(default) or “USB”.  
After changing this setting via the menu, turn the  
power OFF and then back ON to implement the  
change.  
Qꢀ $XGLRꢀ/HYHOꢀ6HWWLQJV  
You can set the input and output audio levels of  
an ACC2 connection via Menu Nos. 66 and 67,  
and the input and output audio levels of a USB  
connection via Menu Nos. 64 and 65. Each setting  
has a range of 0 to 9, with a default setting of 4.  
&21752//,1*ꢀ7+(ꢀ76ꢈꢊꢍꢎ6ꢀ)520ꢀ$ꢀ3&  
If a PC and the TS-590S are connected using a  
serial cable {page 67}, you can remotely control the  
functions of the TS-590S from a PC. Download the  
free ARCP-590 software from the following URL:  
Additionally, you can mix beep tones, the sidetone,  
and the Voice guide for an ACC2/USB audio  
output by accessing Menu No. 68 and selecting  
“on” (whereby the PC will confirm the sounds being  
output from the transceiver speaker).  
http://www.kenwood.com/i/products/info/amateur/software  
_download.htm  
l
The detailed remote controlling instructions are  
available in accompanied documents and help file.  
&+$1*,1*ꢀ7+(ꢀ6,*1$/ꢀ)25ꢀ7+(ꢀ&20ꢀ7(50,1$/  
Send the PSQ (SQL control signal) and PKS signal  
through the COM terminal.  
5(027(/<ꢀ&21752//,1*ꢀ7+(ꢀ76ꢈꢊꢍꢎ6ꢀ21ꢀ7+(ꢀ  
1(7:25.  
1 Turn the transceiver power OFF.  
In addition to the ARCP-590 program, the ARHP-590  
program can also be downloaded from the above  
site. This ARHP-590 program is an ARCP-590 host  
program that allows a user who is connected in the  
network to remotely control the TS-590S transceiver  
from a distant location. If you make interface  
cables that transfer the audio between the TS-590S  
transceiver and the PC on the host transceiver, you  
can receive signals and transmit your voice over the  
network. For detailed information, download the  
ARHP-590 program and consult the accompanied  
documents.  
2 Press [FM/AM (FM-N)] + [ ].  
•
“PSQ/PKS” momentarily appears, and the  
RTS/CTS signal is replaced with the PSQ/PKS  
signal at the COM terminal.  
3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 to return to normal operation.  
“CTS/RTS” momentarily appears.  
•
The operation of the output signal for each setting is  
as follows:  
PC  
RxD  
TxD  
CTS  
RTS  
GND  
RxD  
TxD  
CTS  
RTS  
GND  
COM Terminal  
TxD  
Note: The ARHP-590 does not support voice communication.  
In order to use voice communications, you must also use  
universal VoIP software.  
RxD  
CTS/  
RTS  
RTS  
237,21$/ꢀ9*6ꢈꢁꢀ92,&(ꢀ*8,'(ꢀ ꢀ  
6725$*(ꢀ81,7  
CTS  
GND  
The optional VGS-1 unit allows you to record 30  
second (maximum) voice messages to memory  
channels 1 and 2, and 15 second (maximum) voice  
messages to memory channels 3 and 4. After  
recording a message via your transceiver microphone,  
you can then transmit those recorded messages. It  
also announces the key function and frequencies each  
time you press a key (Voice announcement). Since  
the incoming reception signal is processed in digital  
data in the transceiver, the VGS-1 can be configured  
to constantly store the incoming audio signals in the  
background. If you wish, you can store the last 30  
seconds of the incoming signal to the VGS-1 for the  
later playback (Constant recording).  
TxD (stopped)  
RxD (stopped)  
PSQ  
PSQ/  
PKS  
PKS  
GND  
Normal PC commands (ARCP, ARHP, or SKY  
COMMAND) will not work when this function is turned  
ON.  
•
When operating the TS-590S as a base station,  
using VoIP or similar software, set Menu No. 77 to  
“SQL”.  
At the same time, if you are using CTCSS, set  
Menu No 75 to “2” and confirm that the frequency  
is not already in use and is not causing any  
interference.  
For information on how to install the VGS-1 unit, refer  
to “INSTALLING OPTIONS” {page 71}.  
•
When turning the power OFF and the VoIP  
58  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ꢁꢅꢀꢀ23(5$725ꢀ&219(1,(1&(6  
Qꢀ &KHFNLQJꢀ0HVVDJHV  
1 Select SSB, FM, or AM mode.  
5(&25',1*ꢀ0(66$*(6  
This section explains how to record a single message.  
•
Select the same mode when you recorded  
the message.  
1 Select SSB, FM, or AM mode.  
•
Select a mode that you wish to transmit.  
•
Confirm that the VOX function is OFF.  
2 Press and hold [CH1 (REC)] to record the  
2 Press [CH1 (REC)], [CH2 (REC)], [CH3  
(REC)], or [RX/4 (REC)], depending on which  
channel you want to check.  
message for channel 1.  
•
BT in Morse code sounds and “AP 1 –”  
appears.  
•
For example, “AP 1– –” appears while playing  
back the message in channel 1.  
•
To interrupt playback, press [CLR].  
3 To play back another message in sequence,  
press the corresponding key ([CH1 (REC)],  
[CH2 (REC)], [CH3 (REC)], or [RX/4 (REC)])  
while the first message is being played.  
•
To quit recording your message, press [CLR].  
3 Press [MIC (CAR)], then rotate the MULTI/CH  
control to adjust the microphone gain so that the  
ALC level is at maximum while the voice is at the  
maximum level.  
•
Up to 4 channels can be queued.  
4 Hold [CH1 (REC)] and speak into your  
Qꢀ 6HQGLQJꢀ0HVVDJHV  
microphone.  
1 Select SSB, FM, or AM mode.  
•
Four channels are available for recording  
messages. Press [CH2 (REC)], [CH3 (REC)],  
or [RX/4 (REC)] in place of [CH1 (REC)], in  
steps 3 and 4 to record the message on a  
different channel.  
•
Select the same mode when you recorded  
the message.  
2 Press [VOX (LEV)] to switch VOX ON or OFF.  
If you switched VOX ON, skip step 3.  
•
•
If Constant Recording is active, [RX/4 (REC)] is  
unavailable for message recording.  
3 Press [SEND] or hold Mic [PTT].  
4 Press [CH1 (REC)], [CH2 (REC)], [CH3  
(REC)], or [RX/4 (REC)], depending on which  
channel you want to use.  
5 Release the key when you have finished recording  
your message.  
•
•
•
When the maximum recording time passes,  
recording automatically stops.  
•
For example, “AP 1– –” appears while playing  
back the message in channel 1.  
The contents of the channel is overwritten with  
the new message.  
•
To interrupt playback, press [CLR].  
5 To play back another message in sequence,  
press the corresponding key ([CH1 (REC)],  
[CH2 (REC)], [CH3 (REC)], or [RX/4 (REC)])  
while the first message is being played.  
“WRITING” appears while the transceiver is  
storing the message data to the VGS-1 flash  
memory.  
6 Repeat steps 2 to 5 to record a message on  
•
Up to 4 channels can be queued.  
another channel.  
6 If you pressed [SEND] or Mic [PTT] in step 3,  
Note: Pressing [ ] cancels the recording in progress and  
clears the memory channel.  
press [SEND] again or release Mic [PTT].  
0(66$*(ꢀ3/$<%$&.  
Qꢀ (UDVLQJꢀDꢀ5HFRUGHGꢀ0HVVDJH  
You can play back the message in channel 1, 2, 3, or  
4 to check or send them. It is also possible to make  
a longer message by consecutively playing back the  
messages of more than one channel, linking them  
together.  
1 Press and hold [CH1 (REC)], [CH2 (REC)],  
[CH3 (REC)], or [RX/4 (REC)] to select the  
message you want to erase.  
•
“AP n – –” appears, where “n” represents the  
channel number.  
You can even repeatedly send a longer, linked  
message by using the Repeat function. To switch  
this function ON, access Menu No. 56 and select “on”  
(default is OFF). Then, select the repeat interval time  
in Menu No. 57 (default is 10 seconds).  
2 To erase the recorded message, press and hold  
the same key as in step 1 ([CH1 (REC)], [CH2  
(REC)], [CH3 (REC)], or [RX/4 (REC)]) while  
simultaneously pressing [CLR].  
•
A beep sounds and the message is erased.  
Note:  
X
Pressing [ ] cancels the playback in progress.  
Qꢀ &KDQJLQJꢀ,QWHUꢈPHVVDJHꢀ,QWHUYDOꢀ7LPH  
X
The settings in Menu Nos. 56 and 57 are shared with CW  
Message Playback described in “CW MESSAGE MEMORY”  
{page 34}.  
For repetitive message playback, you can change  
the interval between each series of messages.  
Use Menu No. 57, and select the interval time in  
the range of 0 to 60 seconds.  
59  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ꢁꢅꢀꢀ23(5$725ꢀ&219(1,(1&(6  
Qꢀ &KDQJLQJꢀ0HVVDJHꢀ3OD\EDFNꢀ9ROXPH  
Operations using VOICE1  
Turning the AF control does not change the  
volume for the message playback. To change the  
message playback volume , access Menu No. 05  
to select the playback volume level from “1” to “9”  
or “oFF”.  
Operation  
Announcement  
IF filter selection  
(High Cut)  
“High” + Setting value1  
IF filter selection  
(Low Cut)  
IF filter selection (Width) “Width” + Setting value1  
IF filter selection (Shift) “Shift” + Setting value1  
“Low” + Setting value1  
&2167$17ꢀ5(&25',1*  
By utilizing the digital recording capability of the  
VGS-1, you can configure the VGS-1 to store the last  
30 seconds of communications (transmitted signals  
and received signals when the squelch opens). You  
can play back the last 30 seconds of communications  
to confirm what has been heard.  
Tone frequency  
selection/ when tone ID “Tone” + Setting value1  
scanning is complete  
CTCSS frequency  
selection/ when CTCSS “CTCSS” + Setting value1  
ID scanning is complete  
To activate the Constant Recording function, access  
Menu No. 55 and select “on” (default). “ ” appears  
and the the transceiver starts recording the signal in  
the background. When you press and hold [RX/4  
(REC)], the VGS-1 stores the last 30 seconds  
(maximum) of the reception audio signal to the flash  
memory. While writing the audio signal data to the  
flash memory, “WRITING” appears.  
NR1 level setup  
NR2 level setup  
“NR1” + Setting value1  
“NR2” + Setting value1  
“Memory scan group” +  
Group No. + “Off/On”  
• When selecting a  
group number, the  
group number and “Off/  
On” is announced.  
To play back the stored reception signal, press [RX/4  
(REC)]. To quit, press [CLR].  
Note:  
Memory scan group  
setup  
• When the settings are  
changed, only “Off/On”  
is announced.  
X
While Menu No. 55 is ON, you cannot use channel 4 (RX/4)  
to record and playback a voice message. However, the  
message in channel 4 is not erased. When the Constant  
Recording function is turned OFF (Menu No. 55 is OFF), you  
can playback the message on channel 4.  
While “ ” is not displayed, such as the VGS-1 is playing  
back a message or the Voice Guide function is working, the  
Constant Recording function temporarily pauses.  
“VFO” + “Scan” + “Group”  
+ Section defined No. +  
“Off/On”  
X
X
X
When you record a new message to the VGS-1, the 30  
second Constant Recording buffer is cleared.  
You cannot transmit a stored audio signal that is recorded  
with the Constant Recording function.  
• When selecting the  
section defined number,  
the section defined  
number and “Off/On” is  
announced.  
Program/VFO scanning  
section setup  
92,&(ꢀ*8,'(  
• When the settings are  
changed, only “Off/On”  
is announced.  
When the optional VGS-1 is installed, each time  
you change the transceiver mode such as VFO A/  
B or Memory Recall, the transceiver automatically  
announces the new mode. In addition, you can  
program the front panel [PF A] or [PF B] key so  
that pressing it makes the transceiver announce the  
displayed information. If you are using the optional  
MC-47 microphone, you can program one of the Mic  
[PF] keys for this function as well.  
“VOX gain” + Setting  
value1  
VOX gain level setup  
Speech processor input “Processor in” + Setting  
level setup  
value1  
Speech processor  
output level setup  
“Processor out” + Setting  
value1  
The tables below indicate the transceiver  
Noise Blanker “1” or “2” “Noise blanker” “1” or “2”  
announcements when the settings are changed.  
Additionally, pressing the [PF] key will perform  
specific announcements depending on whether  
VOICE1, VOICE2, or VOICE3 is selected.  
level setup  
+ Setting value1  
“Mic gain” + Setting  
value1  
Mic Gain adjustment  
“Keying Speed” + Setting  
value1  
Keying Speed selection  
TX power adjustment  
VOX Delay time setup  
VOICE1:  
“TX power” + Setting  
value1  
•
When VOICE 1 auto announcement is ON (Menu  
No. 09), the transceiver settings are automatically  
announced any time the settings are changed.  
“VOX delay” + Setting  
value1  
•
•
Pressing [PF] will announce the currently  
displayed settings.  
Break-in Delay time  
setup  
“Break-in delay” + Setting  
value1  
During a voice announcement, pressing [PF] will  
cancel the announcement.  
TX Monitor volume  
adjustment  
“TX monitor” + Setting  
value1  
60  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ꢁꢅꢀꢀ23(5$725ꢀ&219(1,(1&(6  
Operation  
Announcement  
Status  
Announcement  
Carrier level adjustment “Carrier” + Setting value1  
Empty Channel:  
“Memory in” + Channel  
number + “Blank”  
AGC constant time AGC  
“Fast” + Setting value1  
setting (FAST)  
Press [M.IN]  
While in Memory scroll  
mode  
Stored Channel:  
Channel number +  
(“S” +)1 Frequency  
AGC constant time AGC  
“Slow” + Setting value1  
setting (SLOW)  
“Menu” + Menu number +  
While in Menu mode  
Empty Channel:  
Channel number +  
“Blank”  
Stored Channel:  
Channel number +  
(“S” +)1 Frequency  
Setting value1  
Turn the MULTI/CH  
control  
Changing the channel  
number while in Memory  
scroll mode  
1
During continuous operation, only the setting value is  
announced.  
Status Settings using VOICE1  
Status  
Press [ ]  
While in VFO mode  
Announcement  
“VFO” + (“S” +)1 “A/B” +  
Frequency  
• Announces when  
Menu No. 09 is ON  
Press [ENT]  
While in frequency/  
memory channel number  
entry mode  
Press [A/B (A=B)]  
Changing VFO A or B  
while in VFO mode  
(TF-SET ON/OFF is  
stored)  
“Enter”  
(“S” +)1 “A/B” +  
Frequency  
• Announces when  
Menu No. 09 is ON  
Press [ENT], then  
press the number keys  
Enter the number while  
in frequency/ memory  
channel number entry  
mode  
Entered number  
Press [1.8] ~ [50] or  
[GENE]  
Press [LSB/USB]/ [CW/  
FSK (REV)]/ [FM/AM  
(FM-N)]  
Changing the frequency  
while in VFO mode  
Changing the mode  
while in VFO mode  
Frequency  
• Announces when  
Menu No. 09 is ON  
Press [ENT], then turn  
the MULTI/CH control  
Displaying the frequency  
history while in  
Frequency entry mode  
Frequency  
Press the number keys  
Press [M/V]  
While in Memory channel  
mode  
“Channel” + Channel  
number + (“S” +)1  
Frequency  
“Enter” + Entered  
number  
Enter the number while  
in memory scroll channel  
number entry mode  
Turn the MULTI/CH  
control  
Changing the memory  
channel while in Memory  
channel mode  
Changing the mode  
while in Memory channel  
mode  
“Auto” + Channel  
Press [ENT] + [ ]  
While in Auto setting  
mode  
number + Frequency  
Channel number +  
(“S” +)1 Frequency  
• Announces when  
Menu No. 09 is ON  
• Announces when  
Menu No. 09 is ON  
Turn the MULTI/CH  
control  
Changing the channel  
number while in Auto  
setting mode  
Channel number +  
Frequency  
• Announces when  
Menu No. 09 is ON  
Hold or Release [TF-  
SET]  
TF-SET ON/OFF while in  
Memory scroll mode  
(“S” +)1 Frequency  
• Announces when  
Menu No. 09 is ON  
Press the number keys  
Frequency  
• Announces when  
Menu No. 09 is ON  
Changing the frequency/  
mode while in Auto  
setting mode  
“Quick memory” +  
Channel number +  
(“S” +)1 “A/B” +  
Frequency  
Press [Q-MR]  
While in Quick memory  
mode  
Press and hold [FINE]  
Turning the frequency  
lock ON/OFF  
“Frequency lock” +  
“On”/“Off”  
Turn the MULTI/CH  
control  
Changing the memory  
channel while in Quick  
memory mode  
Channel number +  
(“S” +)1 “A/B” +  
Frequency  
• Announces when  
Menu No. 09 is ON  
Press [FM/AM (FM-N)]  
+ [ ]  
Changing the output  
signal for the PC control  
terminal 2  
CTS/RTS Output Mode:  
“CTSRTS on”  
PSQ/PKS Output Mode:  
“PSQPKS on”  
61  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ꢁꢅꢀꢀ23(5$725ꢀ&219(1,(1&(6  
VOICE3 Announcements  
SWR meter ALC meter  
Status  
Announcement  
Press [A/B (A=B)] +  
[ ], then turn the  
MULTI/CH control  
Dot  
Dot  
position  
Announcement  
Announcement  
“VFO reset?”  
“Full reset?”  
position  
Reset confirmation  
1
R 1.0  
R 1.5  
0
1
A 0  
A 1  
during VFO reset2  
2 ~ 6  
Press [A/B (A=B)] +  
[ ], then turn the  
MULTI/CH control  
7 ~ 11  
12 ~ 16  
17 ~ 24  
25 ~ 30  
R 2.0  
2
A 2  
R 3.0  
~
~
Reset confirmation  
R 5.0  
13  
14  
15 ~  
A 13  
A 14  
A OVER  
during Full reset2  
R OVER  
1
2
3
Announced when operating in Split-frequency mode.  
Announced even when the auto Voice announcement is OFF.  
When auto Voice announcement is ON, various configuration  
images appear on the display. When modifications are made to  
these settings, the new setting is announced.  
COMP meter  
Dot  
position  
Announcement  
VOICE2:  
0
C 0 dB  
C 10 dB  
C 20 dB  
C OVER  
•
Pressing [PF] will announce the current state of  
the S meter/ RF meter.  
1 ~ 10  
11 ~ 20  
21 ~ 30  
•
During a voice announcement, pressing [PF] will  
cancel the announcement.  
VOICE2 Announcements  
Qꢀ 9RLFHꢀ*XLGHꢀ$QQRXQFHPHQWꢀ9ROXPHꢀ  
S meter  
PWR meter  
Turning the AF control does not change the  
volume for the Voice Guide announcement. To  
change the announcement volume , access Menu  
No. 06 and select the volume level from “1” to “7”  
or “oFF”.  
Dot  
position  
Dot  
position  
Announcement  
Announcement  
0
1 ~ 3  
4 ~ 5  
6
S 0  
S 1  
0
P 0  
P 5  
1 ~ 3  
S 2  
4 ~ 6  
P 10  
P 25  
P 50  
P 75  
P 100  
Qꢀ 9RLFHꢀ*XLGHꢀ$QQRXQFHPHQWꢀ6SHHGꢀ  
S 3  
7 ~ 12  
13 ~ 18  
19 ~ 23  
24 ~ 30  
If you feel the Voice Announcement speed is  
too slow or too fast, you can adjust the Voice  
Announcement speed. Five different speeds can  
be configured. Access Menu No. 07 and select “0”  
to “4”, where 0 is the slowest speed and 4 is the  
fastest. The default speed is 1.  
7 ~ 8  
9
S 4  
S 5  
10 ~ 11  
12  
S 6  
S 7  
13 ~ 14  
15  
S 8  
Qꢀ 9RLFHꢀ*XLGHꢀ$QQRXQFHPHQWꢀ/DQJXDJHꢀ  
S 9  
If you mistakenly change the announcement  
language, you can change it back to English by  
accessing Menu No. 08 and selecting “EN”.  
16 ~ 19  
20  
10 dB  
20 dB  
30 dB  
40 dB  
50 dB  
60 dB  
21 ~ 24  
25  
(0(5*(1&<ꢀ&$//ꢀꢂ.ꢀ7<3(ꢀ21/<ꢃ  
26 ~ 29  
30  
Section 97.401(d) of the regulations governing  
amateur radio in the United States permit emergency  
amateur communications on 5167.5 kHz by stations  
in or within 92.6 km of the state of Alaska. This  
frequency is for use only when the immediate safety  
of human life and/or property are threatened, and is  
never to be used for routine communications.  
VOICE3:  
•
Pressing [PF] will announce the current state of  
the SWR meter/ ALC meter/ COMP meter.  
•
During a voice announcement, pressing [PF] will  
cancel the announcement.  
Press [EMERGENCY] to change to the Emergency  
channel (5167.5 kHz/ USB).  
•
•
[EMERGENCY] can be programmed onto a PF  
key.  
When entering Emergency mode, “EMERGENCY”  
momentarily appears on the sub-display.  
62  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ꢁꢅꢀꢀ23(5$725ꢀ&219(1,(1&(6  
Note:  
';ꢀ3$&.(7&/867(5ꢀ781(  
X
RIT/XIT turns OFF automatically when entering Emergency  
mode.  
If you have a TH-D72(A/E)/ TM-D710A/E(A/E)/ RC-  
D710/ TM-D700(A/E), you can connect it to the TS-  
590S transceiver to use the DX PacketCluster Tune  
function. Connect the 2 transceivers with a cross-  
wired DB-9 cable as shown on page 70.  
X
The transceiver will not switch to the Emergency channel  
if you are using the constant recorder and are either  
transmitting, receiving a voice call, or receiving a CW call.  
&5266%$1'ꢀ5(3($7(5ꢀ  
1 On the TS-590S, press [MENU], then turn MULTI/  
If you have a Kenwood FM transceiver (K type) with a  
6 pin mini DIN connector, you can set up the TS-590S  
transceiver and the FM transceiver as a crossband  
repeater. The FM transceiver will receive signals you  
transmit from the additional VHF or UHF transceiver  
when both transceivers are set with the same  
CH control to select Menu No. 61.  
2 Press [M.IN]/ [SCAN (SG.SEL)] to select the same  
communication baud rate configured on the TH-  
D72/ TM-D710/ RC-D710/ TM-D700.  
3 Tune to the DX PacketCluster node frequency on  
frequency. The signal is then routed to the  
the TH-D72/ TM-D710 RC-D710/ TM-D700.  
TS-590S transceiver and retransmitted on the  
frequency you have set on the TS-590S transceiver.  
Likewise, signals received on the TS-590S transceiver  
are routed to the FM transceiver and retransmitted  
to the transceiver you have with you, allowing you to  
hear the received call in a distant location.  
4 Using [TNC], enter the APRS mode on the  
TM-D710/ RC-D710/ TM-D700.  
•
“APRS” or “TNC APRS” appears on the  
TH-D72/ TM-D710/ RC-D710/ TM-D700  
display.  
5 Using [DX], enter the DX PacketCluster mode on  
To interface between the TS-590S transceiver and  
FM transceiver (K type), refer to “CROSSBAND  
REPEATER” {page 70}.  
Note: For the repeater function to operate, the squelch levels  
of both transceivers (TS-590S and FM transceiver) must be  
adjusted properly so that no background noise can be heard; the  
transmission is controlled by monitoring the squelch status only.  
the TH-D72/ TM-D710/ RC-D710/ TM-D700.  
•
Every time the DX station’s information is  
reported to the DX PacketCluster node, the  
TH-D72/ TM-D710/ RC-D710/ TM-D700 stores  
and lists the report to the memory.  
6 Select a desired DX station data with [V]/ [W] on  
the TH-D72/ TM-D710/ RC-D710/ TM-D700.  
23(5$7,21  
7 Press [TUNE] on the TM-D710/ RC-D710 or  
[MENU] on the TH-D72 or [MHz] on the TM-D700  
to transfer the frequency data to the TS-590S  
transceiver.  
The crossband repeater function uses 2 frequency  
bands to receive and transmit signals. When a signal  
is received on one band, it is retransmitted on the  
other band.  
•
If the transferred frequency data is available  
on the TS-590S transceiver, the frequency  
data will be overwritten to the current operating  
frequency. Otherwise, the operating frequency  
of the TS-590S transceiver remains unchanged.  
1 Select a transmission/ reception VHF or UHF  
frequency on the FM transceiver.  
2 Confirm the PTT icon is visible on the crossband  
repeater frequency on the FM transceiver.  
For more detailed information on the DX  
PacketCluster operation of the TH-D72/ TM-D710/  
RC-D710/ TM-D700, refer to their respective  
instruction manuals.  
Note: The firmware of the TM-D700(A/E) transceiver must be  
version G2.0 or later to use the DX PacketCluster Tune function.  
3 Select the same frequency for the terminal  
transceiver.  
4 Select a HF/ 50 MHz frequency on the TS-590S  
transceiver.  
5 Adjust the squelch threshold level so that both the  
TS-590S and FM transceivers mute.  
6 On the TS-590S, press [MENU], then turn MULTI/  
CH control to select Menu Nos. 73 and 74.  
7 Press [M.IN] to select “on”.  
•
When the TS-590S transceiver’s squelch  
opens, the FM transceiver simultaneously  
retransmits the incoming audio signal on the  
VHF or UHF frequency.  
•
When the FM transceiver’s squelch opens, the  
TS-590S transceiver retransmits the incoming  
audio signal on the HF/ 50 MHz frequency.  
8 Access Menu Nos. 66 and 67 and press [M.IN]/  
[SCAN (SG.SEL)] to adjust the input/ output audio  
level.  
9 To quit the FM repeater operation, disconnect the  
interface cable between the transceivers, then  
access Menu Nos. 73 and 74 on the TS-590S  
transceiver and select “oFF”.  
63  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ꢁꢅꢀꢀ23(5$725ꢀ&219(1,(1&(6  
35(3$5$7,21  
6.<ꢀ&200$1'ꢀ,,  
Although you can use a TH-D7A, TH-D72A/E,  
TM-D710A, TM-V71A + RC-D710, or TM-D700A  
transceiver as a “Commander” (an external remote  
control unit), the following procedure shows how  
to set up your TS-590S and TH-D7A, TH-D72A/E,  
TM-D710A, TM-V71A + RC-D710, or TM-D700A  
transceivers as a “Transporter” at a base station and  
the TM-D710A, TM-V71A + RC-D710, or TM-D700A  
transceiver as a “Commander”.  
Sky Command II allows you to remotely control the  
TS-590S transceiver from a separate location.  
If you have more than 2 TH-D7A/ TH-D72A/E/  
TM-D710A/ TM-V71A + RC-D710/ TM-D700A  
transceivers (K type), you can perform Sky Command  
II operation to remotely control the HF/ 50 MHz band  
of your TS-590S transceiver.  
You will use one transceiver (TH-D7A, TH-D72A/E,  
TM-D710A, TM-V71A + RC-D710, or TM-D700A) as a  
remote control unit, called a “Commander”. The other  
VHF/ UHF transceiver (TH-D7A, TH-D72A/E,  
TM-D710A, TM-V71A + RC-D710, or TM-D700A) with  
the TS-590S transceiver is called the “Transporter”.  
This TH-D7A, TH-D72A/E, TM-D710A, TM-V71A +  
RC-D710, or TM-D700A transceier will function as  
an interface between the Commander (a remote  
control unit) and the HF/ 50 MHz band of the TS-590S  
transceiver.  
6WDUWLQJꢀ6N\ꢀ&RPPDQGꢀ,,ꢀRSHUDWLRQꢏ  
After you have completed setting up the following,  
you can start Sky Command II operation. Without  
programming these parameters, you cannot use Sky  
Command II.  
TS-590S + TH-D7A/ TH-D72A/E/ TM-D700A/  
TM-D710A/ TM-V71A + RC-D710 (Transporter)  
Setup:  
This system allows you, for example, to watch for and  
hunt DX while washing your car, or to operate the HF  
transceiver while relaxing in your car, living room, or  
patio, instead of actually operating inside your shack.  
Note: Operation of Sky Command II may not been permitted in  
certain countries. Check your local laws before operating.  
1 Configure the TH-D7A, TH-D72A/E, TM-D710A,  
TM-V71A + RC-D710, or TM-D700A as a  
“Transporter” and connect all the necessary cables  
to the TS-590S transceiver.  
2 Select a frequency (HF/ 50 MHz band) on the  
TS-590S transceiver.  
3 On the TS-590S, press [MENU], then turn MULTI/  
CH control to select Menu No. 61.  
4 Press [M.IN]/ [SCAN (SG.SEL] to select the the  
desired communication speed.  
5 Select the same communication parameters to  
match the TH-D7A, TH-D72A/E, TM-D710A,  
TM-V71A + RC-D710, or TM-D700A transceiver  
6 Press [MENU] to exit Menu mode.  
6.<ꢀ&200$1'ꢀ,,ꢀ',$*5$0  
7 Configure and start the Transporter mode on the  
TH-D7A, TH-D72A/E, TM-D710A, TM-V71A +  
RC-D710, or TM-D700A transceiver.  
VHF freq.  
Audio  
Audio  
UHF freq.  
•
Refer to the respective instruction manuals of  
the TH-D7A, TH-D72A/E, TM-D710A, TM-V71A  
+ RC-D710, or TM-D700A for information on  
how to connect, configure, and operate the  
transceivers for Sky Command II.  
Control commands  
Audios  
Control commands  
tResponse  
tResponse  
Commander  
Transporter  
64  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
&211(&7,1*ꢀ3(5,3+(5$/ꢀ(48,30(17  
7(50,1$/ꢀ'(6&5,37,216  
&20ꢀ&211(&725  
Pin No.  
Pin Name  
NC  
Function  
I/O  
—
O
I
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
No connection  
Transmit data  
Receive data  
RXD  
TXD  
NC  
—
—
—
I
No connection  
Ground  
GND  
NC  
No connection  
Receive enable  
Transmit enable  
No connection  
RTS  
CTS  
NC  
O
—
$&&ꢅꢀ&211(&725  
Pin No.  
Pin Name  
NC  
Function  
I/O  
—
I
1
2
No connection  
RTTY key input  
RTTY  
Audio output from the transceiver  
•
Connect to the audio input of the TNC, MCP, or PC (or PC  
interface connection).  
•
•
Audio output level is independent from the AF control setting.  
Audio output level can be changed by adjusting the value  
in Menu No. 67. Set the value to a moderate audio output  
level. The default value of 4 is approximately 0.5 Vp-p, which  
is a standard modulating signal. The settings of 0 ~ 9 vary  
3
ANO  
O
from approximately 0 Vp-p to 1.2 Vp-p  
.
‡ꢀꢀ ,PSHGDQFHꢐꢀꢀ$SSUR[ꢁꢀꢏꢃꢀNŸꢁ  
—
O
4
5
GND  
PSQ  
Ground  
Transceiver squelch control  
•
Connect to the squelch input of the TNC, MCP, or PC  
connection interface.  
•
•
Squelch open: Low impedance  
Squelch closed: High impedance  
—
—
—
6
7
8
NC  
NC  
No connection  
No connection  
GND  
Ground  
PTT input for data communication  
•
Connect to the PTT output of the TNC, MCP, or PC  
connection interface.  
Microphone audio input mutes when transmitting.  
I
9
PKS  
NC  
•
—
10  
No connection  
Audio input for data communication  
•
•
•
Connect to the audio output of the TNC, MCP, or PC (or PC  
interface connection).  
Audio input level is independent from the microphone gain  
(set with the [MIC] key).  
I
11  
ANI  
Audio input level can be changed by adjusting the value in  
Menu No. 66. The default value of 4 is approximately 10  
mVrms, which is a standard modulating signal. The settings  
of 0 ~ 9 vary from approximately 0 mVrms to 1 mVrms  
.
‡ꢀꢀ ,PSHGDQFHꢐꢀꢀ$SSUR[ꢁꢀꢏꢃꢀNŸꢁ  
—
I
12  
13  
GND  
SS  
Ground  
PTT input (same as the front panel MIC connector)  
65  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ꢁꢇꢀꢀ&211(&7,1*ꢀ3(5,3+(5$/ꢀ(48,30(17  
5(027(ꢀ&211(&725  
Pin No.  
Pin Name  
SPO  
Function  
I/O  
O
1
2
Speaker output  
COM  
Common terminal  
I/O  
Standby; when grounded, the transceiver enters TX  
mode.  
3
4
SS  
I
When connected with the common terminal, the amplifier  
enters TX mode.  
MKE  
I/O  
When connected with the common terminal, the amplifier  
enters RX mode.  
5
6
7
BRK  
ALC  
RL  
I/O  
I
ALC input from the amplifier  
Approx. +12 V DC is output when in TX mode (10 mA  
max.).  
O
(;7ꢄ$7ꢀ&211(&725ꢀꢂIRUꢀ$7ꢈꢇꢎꢎꢃ  
Pin No.  
Pin Name  
Function  
Ground  
I/O  
—
1
2
3
4
5
6
GND  
TT  
AT-300 control input/ output  
Ground  
I/O  
—
GND  
NC  
—
No connection  
TS  
AT-300 control input/ output  
Power supply for EXT.AT Switched 13.8V.  
I/O  
O
14S  
0,&ꢀ&211(&725  
Pin No.  
Pin Name  
MIC  
SS  
Function  
MIC signal input  
MIC standby (PTT) control  
MIC Down control  
MIC UP control  
Switched 8V  
I/O  
I
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
I
MD  
I
MU  
I
8A  
O
—
—
—
NC  
No connection  
MSG  
MCG  
MIC GND  
GND  
66  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ꢁꢇꢀꢀ&211(&7,1*ꢀ3(5,3+(5$/ꢀ(48,30(17  
Note: Use a USB/ RS-232C cable shorter than 3 meters.  
&20387(5  
The USB connector allows you to directly connect a computer by using a USB (AB type) or RS-232 cable. By  
connecting a USB cable to the PC, you can enable the input and output of the transmission and reception of sound.  
You must use the ARUA-10 software to control the USB audio system line of the PC, available at:  
http://www.kenwood.com/i/products/info/amateur/software_download.html  
Note:  
X
X
X
The USB cable and RS-232C cable are not included; purchase them separately.  
Connect the USB cable directly to the PC.  
In theory, a delay occurs in the USB audio system. Therefore, sound may be clipped when using a PC in this system. Use this USB  
audio system in cases where you are recording communications that do not require quick responses to a PC.  
TS-590S  
To RS-232C serial port  
(f)  
To USB port  
(f)  
RS-232C straight  
cable  
Personal computer  
USB cable  
&203$7,%/(ꢀ75$16&(,9(5  
When transferring data to or from another TS-590S, TS-480HX/SAT, TS-2000/X, TS-570S/D, or TS-870S, directly  
connect the 2 transceivers using the COM connectors.  
Compatible transceiver  
TS-590S  
(f)  
(f)  
DB-9 connector wiring (Cross-wired)  
RS-232C cross cable  
67  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ꢁꢇꢀꢀ&211(&7,1*ꢀ3(5,3+(5$/ꢀ(48,30(17  
577<ꢀ23(5$7,21  
Use the ACC 2 connector to interface with your MCP. If your MCP supports RTTY keying output, connect the  
output to pin 2 of the ACC 2 connector. Connect the demodulation input line of the MCP to pin 3 of the ACC 2  
connector. Also, connect the transmission control line of the MCP to pin 3 of the REMOTE terminal. Select “FSK”  
or “FSR” when you operate the RTTY mode.  
Note: Do not share a single power supply between the transceiver and the RTTY equipment. Keep as wide a separation as possible  
between the transceiver and the RTTY equipment to reduce noise-pickup by the transceiver.  
TS-590S  
Power supply for MCP  
MCP  
Personal computer  
+)ꢆꢀꢊꢎꢀ0+]ꢀ/,1($5ꢀ$03/,),(5  
Connect an external transmission power amplifier to the REMOTE connector. Switch ON the linear amplifier  
control relay via Menu No. 53 (HF) or 54 (50 MHz). Select “2” or “3” if you use the internal relay to control the linear  
amplifier status.  
The TX/ RX relay response time is 10 [ms] when you have selected CW Full Break-in and 25 [ms] when you have  
selected CW Semi Break-in.  
Note: The TX/ RX control method differs, depending on external amplifier models. Some amplifiers enter the TX mode when the control  
terminal is grounded. For those amplifiers, connect pin 2 of the REMOTE connector to the GND terminal of the amplifier and connect pin 4  
of the connector to the control terminal of the amplifier.  
TL-922 (HF linear amplifier)  
TS-590S  
(The TL-922 Linear Amplifier is  
a discontinued model. It may  
no longer be available in your  
Control relay  
area.)  
R
T
2
4
5
7
REMOTE connector  
1
6
3
(front view)  
GND  
68  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ꢁꢇꢀꢀ&211(&7,1*ꢀ3(5,3+(5$/ꢀ(48,30(17  
$17(11$ꢀ781(5  
Use the ANT 1 and AT connectors to connect an AT-300 external antenna tuner. If you connect the external  
antenna tuner to the ANT 2 connector, it will not function.  
Note: The AT-300 cannot be used for 50 MHz operation.  
ANT 1  
connector  
TS-590S  
AT-300  
(The AT-300 Antenna Tuner is  
a discontinued model. It may  
no longer be available in your  
area.)  
71&ꢀ$1'ꢀ0&3  
Use the DATA connector to connect the Audio input/ output lines from a Terminal Node Controller (TNC) for Packet  
operation, a Multimode Communications Processor (MCP) for operation on AFSK, Packet, PacTOR, AMTOR,  
G-TORTM, PSK31, or FAX, or a Clover interface. Also use the ACC 2 connector to connect SSTV and phone patch  
equipment.  
•
•
•
Connect the TNC or MCP to the ACC 2 connector using a cable equipped with a 13-pin DIN plug.  
Connecting the TNC or MCP to a personal computer or dumb terminal requires an RS-232C cable.  
Select LSB or USB mode (it depends on the communication mode) when you operate the MCP/ TNC.  
Note: Do not share a single power supply between the transceiver and the TNC or MCP. Keep as wide a separation as possible between  
the transceiver and the computer to reduce noise-pickup by the transceiver.  
TS-590S  
Power supply for TNC/ MCP  
TNC/MCP  
Personal computer  
69  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ꢁꢇꢀꢀ&211(&7,1*ꢀ3(5,3+(5$/ꢀ(48,30(17  
';ꢀ3$&.(7&/867(5ꢀ781(  
If you have a TH-D72A/E/ TM-D710A/E/ RC-D710/ TM-D700A/E, you can connect the TH-D72A/E/ TM-D710A/E/  
RC-D710/ TM-D700A/E to the TS-590S transceiver to use the DX PacketCluster Tune function. Connect the 2  
transceivers with a cross-wired RS-232C cable as shown below. (For connecting to the TH-D72A/E, refer to the  
TH-D72A/E instruction manual.)  
RS-232C cross cable  
TS-590S  
TM-D710A/E/  
RC-D710 + TM-V71A/E  
(m)  
(f)  
TM-D700A/E  
(f)  
RC-D710 + PG-5J  
(f)  
PG-5G  
&5266%$1'ꢀ5(3($7(5  
If you have a Kenwood FM transceiver (K type) with a 6 pin mini DIN connector, you can connect the FM  
transceiver to the TS-590S transceiver to use the Crossband repeater function. Connect the 2 transceivers with a  
DIN (13-pin)/ mini DIN cable (6-pin) as shown below.  
DIN (13-pin)/ Mini DIN (6-pin)  
TS-590S  
TM-D710A/ TM-V71A  
TM-D700A  
DIN (13-pin) pulg  
Mini DIN (6-pin) pulg  
PKS  
ANI  
PR1  
SQC  
ANO  
PSQ  
PKD  
PKS  
After connecting the 2 transceivers with the cable, access Menu Nos. 73 (PKS polarity) and 74 (Busy lockout) on  
the TS-590S transceiver and select “on”. You will further need to adjust the audio input/ output level of the TS-  
590S transceiver using Menu Nos. 66 and 67.  
70  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
,167$//,1*ꢀ237,216  
You will require a #1 Philips screwdriver to install the  
VGS-1 or SO-3 TCXO. You will also need a soldering  
iron (approx. 30 watts) to install the SO-3 TCXO.  
9*6ꢈꢁꢀ92,&(ꢀ*8,'(ꢀ ꢀ6725$*(ꢀ81,7  
1 Remove the shield cover (4 screws).  
Switch OFF the transceiver power and unplug the DC power  
cable before performing any installations.  
5(029,1*ꢀ7+(ꢀ%27720ꢀ&$6(  
When installing the optional VGS-1 or SO-3 TCXO,  
remove the bottom case of the transceiver:  
1 Remove the 10 screws.  
2 Lift off the bottom case.  
2 There are 5 rubber cushions in the VGS-1  
package. Use the 2 rubber cushions shown below  
(20 x 30 x 2 mm and 21 x 21 x 2.5 mm) and attach  
them to the VGS-1.  
•
The remaining cushions are not used.  
3 Plug the VGS-1 into the VGS-1 connector of the  
PC board, pressing down on the top of the VGS-1  
until secure.  
4 Replace the shield cover and tighten the 4 screws.  
5 Replace the bottom case (10 screws).  
Note: After installation, you can adjust the VGS-1 playback and  
voice guide volume by selecting Menu Nos. 05 and 06.  
71  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ꢁꢉꢀꢀ,167$//,1*ꢀ237,216  
62ꢈꢇꢀ7&;2  
The SO-3 option improves the transceiver frequency  
stability to 0.5 ppm.  
5()(5(1&(ꢀ)5(48(1&<ꢀ&$/,%5$7,21ꢀ  
Note: The transceiver is adjusted at the factory prior to  
shipping. Do not perform this adjustment unless it is necessary.  
1 Set the following on the transceiver:  
1 Remove the CN503 connector and TCXO PCB  
•
•
•
•
•
•
Mode: CW  
screw, as shown below.  
AF control: Center  
CN503  
Menu No. 34 (CW RX pitch): 800 Hz  
SHIFT control: 800 Hz  
RIT function: OFF  
TCXO PCB  
Break-in function (VOX): OFF  
2 Remove the bottom case (10 screws) from the  
transceiver.  
3 Tune in a standard frequency station such as  
WWV or WWVH at, for example, 10.000.00 MHz or  
15.000.00 MHz.  
•
•
•
Adjust the Tuning control so that the display  
reads the exact frequency of the station.  
You should hear a beat tone of approximately  
800 Hz.  
2 Remove the TCXO PCB.  
For 800 Hz:  
3 Insert the SO-3 TCXO.  
af  
display  
reference  
f = (f  
/15.600 x $f  
) + 800 Hz  
is the shift from the 15.6 MHz  
reference frequency.  
reference  
where $f  
4 Close your CW key. You will hear a transmit  
sidetone of approximately 800 Hz.  
•
•
•
This sidetone produces a double beat tone  
when it combines with the received signal.  
4 Solder all pins on the reverse side of the PCB.  
5 Re-insert the TCXO PCB in the transceiver.  
6 Connect the CN503 and tighten the screw.  
7 Move the C903 and C904 jumper as shown below.  
Adjust the AF control to hear the double beat  
clearly.  
For 800 Hz:  
sidetone  
f
= 800 Hz 50 ppm (= 800 0.04 Hz)  
reference  
where $f  
is the shift from the 15.6 MHz  
reference frequency.  
5 TS-590S transceiver without SO-3:  
Adjust the trimmer (TC501) to minimize the  
frequency difference between the received 800 Hz  
tone and the 800 Hz sidetone.  
TC501  
CN904  
CN903  
TS-590S transceiver with SO-3:  
Adjust the trimmer inside the SO-3 using the  
supplied plastic adjustment tool. Minimize the  
frequency difference between the received 800 Hz  
tone and the 800 Hz sidetone.  
Note:  
X
To avoid misplacing the jumper, keep it attached to 1 pin of  
C903 or C904.  
X
When removing the SO-3 TCXO, replace the jumper to its  
original position.  
8 Replace the bottom case (10 screws).  
72  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ꢁꢉꢀꢀ,167$//,1*ꢀ237,216  
35(&$87,216  
0%ꢈꢉꢇꢎꢀ02%,/(ꢀ%5$&.(7  
•
When operating mobile, do not attempt to  
configure the transceiver while driving; it is too  
dangerous.  
ATTENTION: When installing the MB-430, use the SEMS  
Screws provided with the TS-590S.  
When installing the MB-430, attach the supplied  
plastic spacers to the transceiver in advance. This  
is necessary to protect the TS-590S transceiver from  
scratches.  
•
Use of the transceiver while you are driving may be  
against traffic laws. Please check and observe the  
vehicle regulations in your area.  
Plastic spacers  
Make sure the tab faces out  
Once the bracket is installed onto the vehicle, prepare  
the transceiver by loosely screwing in the rear screws.  
Hook those screws onto the rear guide rail of the  
mounting bracket then adjust the transceiver to your  
desired angle before tightening the screws. Insert and  
tighten the front screws to secure the transceiver in  
place.  
Front screw  
Rear screw  
To remove the transceiver from the bracket, first  
remove the front screws, then loosen the rear screws  
slightly and pull the transceiver forward to unlatch it  
from the bracket.  
Do not install the transceiver so that it is vertically on its side.  
73  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7528%/(6+227,1*  
*(1(5$/ꢀ,1)250$7,21  
6(59,&(ꢀ127(  
Your transceiver has been factory aligned and  
tested to specification before shipment. Under  
normal circumstances, the transceiver will operate  
in accordance with these operating instructions.  
All adjustable trimmers, coils, and resistors in the  
transceiver are preset at the factory. They should  
only be readjusted by a qualified technician who is  
familiar with this transceiver and has the necessary  
test equipment. Attempting service or alignment  
without factory authorization may void the transceiver  
warranty.  
If you desire to correspond on a technical or  
operational problem, please make your note short,  
complete, and to the point. Help us help you by  
providing the following:  
•
Model and serial number of equipment  
Question or problem you are having  
•
•
Other equipment in your station pertaining to the  
problem  
•
•
Meter readings  
When operated properly, the transceiver will provide  
years of service and enjoyment without requiring  
further realignment. The information in this section  
gives some general service procedures requiring little  
or no test equipment.  
Other related information (Menu setup, mode,  
frequency, key sequence to induce malfunction,  
etc.)  
Do not pack the equipment in crushed newspapers for shipment.  
Extensive damage may result during rough handling or shipping.  
6(59,&(  
If it is ever necessary to return the equipment to  
your dealer or service center for repairs, pack the  
transceiver in its original box and packing material.  
Include a full description of the problems experienced.  
Include both your telephone number and fax number  
(if available) along with your name and address in  
case the service technician needs to call for further  
information while investigating your problem. Don’t  
return accessory items unless you feel they are  
directly related to the service problem. Please do not  
send subassemblies or printed circuit boards. Send  
the complete transceiver.  
Note:  
X
X
X
Record the date of purchase, serial number, and dealer from  
whom the transceiver was purchased.  
For your own information, retain a written record of any  
maintenance performed on the transceiver.  
When claiming warranty service, please include a photocopy  
of the bill of sale or other proof-of-purchase showing the  
date of sale.  
&/($1,1*  
The keys, controls, and case of the transceiver are  
likely to become soiled after extended use. Remove  
the controls from the transceiver and clean them with  
a neutral detergent and warm water. To clean the  
case, use a neutral detergent (no strong chemicals)  
and a damp cloth.  
You may return your transceiver for service to  
the authorized Kenwood dealer from whom you  
purchased it or any authorized Kenwood service  
center. A copy of the service report will be returned  
with the transceiver.  
Tag all returned items with your name and call sign for  
identification. Please mention the model and serial  
number of the transceiver in any communication  
regarding the problem.  
74  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ꢁꢊꢀꢀ7528%/(6+227,1*  
7528%/(6+227,1*  
The problems described in this table are commonly encountered operational malfunctions. These types of  
difficulties are usually caused by improper hook-up, accidental incorrect control settings, or operator error due to  
incomplete programming. These problems are usually not caused by circuit failure. Please review this table and  
the appropriate section(s) of this instruction manual before assuming your transceiver is defective.  
Note: Placing a powered portable transceiver near this transceiver may cause noise in the transceiver.  
Problem  
Probable Cause  
Corrective Action  
Page  
10  
1
The transceiver will  
not power up after  
connecting a 13.8 V  
DC power supply and  
pressing [ ].  
Nothing appears  
on the display and  
no receiver noise is  
heard.  
1 DC power supply is OFF.  
2 Faulty power cable.  
1 Switch the DC power supply ON.  
2 Inspect the power cable. Confirm that the  
polarities are correct (Red: positive (+); Black;  
negative (–)).  
3 Confirm the connections to the DC power  
supply are secure.  
4 Look for the cause of the blown fuse. After  
inspecting and correcting any problems,  
install a new fuse of the specified rating.  
1
2
3 The power cable is not  
connected securely.  
4 The power cable fuse is  
open.  
After switching  
1
1 The input voltage is outside 1 Correct the input voltage or use a 12 ~ 16 V  
the power ON, the  
transceiver does not  
function normally. For  
example, no digits or  
incorrect digits appear  
on the display.  
13.8 V DC 15% (11.7 ~  
15.8 V DC)  
battery.  
78  
2 The microprocessor has  
malfunctioned.  
2 Review “MICROPROCESSOR RESET”.  
After understanding what data will be lost, do  
a VFO Reset. If the problem remains, do a  
Full Reset.  
After switching the  
transceiver ON, the  
transceiver refuses to  
transmit.  
1
The current rating of the DC  
power supply is too low.  
Use a DC power supply that has a 20.5 A or  
higher current rating  
The transceiver does  
not respond correctly  
after pressing key  
combinations or  
turning controls per  
instructions in this  
manual.  
1 Procedures are not being  
followed precisely.  
2 The Frequency Lock  
function is ON.  
1 Review “WRITING CONVENTIONS  
FOLLOWED”.  
ii  
2 Press and hold [FINE (F.LOCK)] to switch  
53  
78  
the function OFF. The “  
” icon disappears.  
3 The microprocessor and its 3 Review “MICROPROCESSOR RESET”.  
memory need to be reset.  
After understanding what data will be lost, do  
a Partial Reset. If the problem remains, do a  
Full Reset.  
The Frequency Lock function  
is ON.  
The frequency cannot  
be changed.  
Press and hold [FINE (F.LOCK)] to switch the  
53  
function OFF. The “  
” icon disappears.  
SSB audio quality is  
very poor; the high or  
low audio frequencies  
are absent.  
1 The wrong operation mode 1 Select USB or LSB for the mode.  
is selected for the receiver.  
11  
38  
39  
39  
2 The IF filter is incorrectly  
set.  
3 Noise Reduction 1 or 2 is  
ON.  
4 Beat Cancel 1 or 2 is ON.  
2 Turn the HI/SHIFT or LO/WIDTH control to  
adjust the DSP filter width.  
3 Press [NR (LEV)] until the NR function turns  
OFF.  
4 Press [BC (A.NOTCH)] until the BC function  
turns OFF.  
No signals are  
received or receive  
sensitivity seems  
poor.  
1 The SQL control is fully  
clockwise.  
2 The Attenuator is ON.  
3 MIC [PTT] is pressed.  
1 Turn the SQL control counterclockwise.  
12  
40  
2 Press [ATT (RX ANT)] to switch the  
Attenuator is OFF.  
3 Release MIC [PTT].  
13  
38  
4 The IF filter bandwidth was 4 Review “DSP FILTERS”, and set the  
incorrectly set.  
controls accordingly.  
5 The wrong antenna  
connector (ANT 1 or ANT  
2) was selected.  
5 Press and hold [PRE (ANT 1/2)] to select the  
other antenna connector.  
50  
6 The pre-amplifier is OFF.  
6 Press [PRE (ANT 1/2)] to switch the function  
ON.  
7 Restart the transceiver by turning the power  
OFF and then back ON. If the problem  
persists, consult Kenwood authorized  
Service Center.  
40  
—
7 An internal DSP error  
occurs.  
75  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ꢁꢊꢀꢀ7528%/(6+227,1*  
Problem  
Probable Cause  
Corrective Action  
Page  
No signals are  
The RF gain was set too low.  
Turn the RF control clockwise to increase the RF  
gain.  
10  
received or receive  
sensitivity seems  
poor; S-meter is  
reading full scale.  
Received signals  
are completely  
unintelligible  
The wrong modulation was  
selected.  
Select the correct modulation mode.  
11  
Memory Scan will not 1 The SQL control was not  
1 Adjust the SQL control to just eliminate  
background noise.  
12  
44  
41  
start scanning.  
set correctly.  
2 Less than 2 memory  
channels were unlocked.  
3 Less than 2 memory  
channels were  
2 Unlock at least 2 memory channels.  
3 Store data in at least 2 memory channels.  
programmed.  
Memory Scan will  
not scan one of the  
stored channels; the  
desired channel is not  
locked out.  
With Group Scan selected, the Select the Memory Group that contains the  
channel you want to scan is in memory channel you want to scan.  
a different group.  
49  
Program Scan will not The start and end frequencies Store different start and end frequencies.  
46  
50  
start scanning.  
are identical  
AT does not finish  
successfully.  
The impedance of the coaxial  
cable and antenna was not  
matched. Tuning does not  
successfully finish depending  
on conditions, although the  
SWR meter indicates smaller  
than 3:1.  
Adjust the antenna system to lower the SWR.  
The internal tuner is  
bypassed immediately system is too high.  
after tuning is started.  
The SWR of the antenna  
Adjust the antenna system to lower the SWR  
50  
2
You cannot transmit  
even though you  
press MIC [PTT], or  
transmissinos result  
in no contacts.  
1 The microphone plug was  
1 Turn OFF the power, ensure the MIC  
connector has no foreign objects in it, then  
plug in the connector firmly.  
not inserted completely into  
the MIC connector.  
2 The Transmit Inhibit  
function is ON.  
3 CW or FSK was selected  
instead of a voice mode.  
4 The DSP TX filter  
bandwidth was improperly  
selected.  
5 The wrong antenna  
connector (ANT 1 or ANT 2)  
was selected.  
2 Change Menu No. 60 to OFF.  
32  
11  
31  
3 Select the correct voice mode.  
4 Adjust the settings in Menu Nos. 25, 26.  
5 Press and hold [PRE (ANT 1/2)] to select the  
50  
other antenna connector.  
Attempting to transmit  
results in the “HELLO”  
message appearing  
and the reception  
1 The antenna is not  
connected correctly.  
2 The impedances of the  
antenna and transceiver  
are not properly matched.  
1 Check the antenna connection. Correct as  
necessary.  
1
2 Reduce the SWR of the antenna system.  
50  
mode being restored.  
3 The input voltage is outside 3 Correct the input voltage or use a 12 ~ 16 V  
1
1
13.8 V DC 15% (11.7 ~  
15.8 V DC).  
4 The current rating of the  
DC power supply is not  
enough.  
battery.  
4 Use a DC power supply that has a current  
rating of more than 20.5 A at 13.8 V DC.  
The transceiver has  
low transmission  
power.  
1 The microphone gain is set 1 When in SSB or AM mode, increase the  
13  
too low.  
microphone gain.  
2 Poor antenna system  
connections are causing  
high SWR.  
2 Check the antenna connections. Confirm that 50  
the antenna tuner is reporting a low SWR.  
76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ꢁꢊꢀꢀ7528%/(6+227,1*  
Problem  
Probable Cause  
Corrective Action  
Increase the VOX gain.  
Page  
VOX does not  
operate.  
30  
The VOX gain is set too low.  
HF/ 50 MHz Linear  
amplifier does not  
operate.  
1 The linear amplifier control 1 Set Menu No. 53 (HF) or 54 (50 MHz) to 1, 2,  
53  
66  
is OFF.  
or 3.  
2 The REMOTE connector  
wiring is wrong or faulty.  
2 Inspect the REMOTE connector wiring and  
correct it as necessary.  
The transceiver’s  
output power  
decreases after a  
short operating time.  
—
—
1 The air filters for the cooling 1 Contact a Kenwood authorized service  
fans have been congested  
with dust.  
center to clean the filters.  
2 The cooling fans cannot  
provide enough air flow to  
cool the transceiver down.  
2 Relocate the transceiver so that air can easily  
flow through the TS-590S to keep the unit  
cooled.  
You cannot access  
and use repeaters.  
25  
25  
1 Many repeaters require a  
subtone or 1750 Hz tone to  
access.  
2 Transmission and/or  
reception frequency is  
wrong.  
1 Review “FM REPEATER OPERATION” and  
select the correct frequency and type of  
subtone.  
2 You must transmit on the repeater’s input  
frequency and receive on the repeater’s  
output frequency. Refer to “FM REPEATER  
OPERATION”.  
Digital operation  
1 Physical connections  
between the transceiver,  
computer, and TNC/ MCP  
are incorrect, or software  
settings in the TNC/ MCP  
are wrong.  
1 Re-check all connections using this manual,  
your TNC/ MCP manual, and your computer  
hardware manual as references.  
67,69  
results in few or no  
connects or contacts  
with other stations.  
2 Different transmission and  
reception frequencies are  
being used.  
3 The levels between the  
transceiver and the TNC/  
MCP are incorrect.  
4 Your transmitted signal or  
the incoming receive signal  
is too weak.  
5 The TX delay time  
parameter in your TNC/  
MCP was incorrectly set.  
2 Confirm that the RIT and XIT functions are  
switched OFF. Confirm that you are not  
operating split frequency.  
3 Adjust TX and RX levels using Menu Nos.  
66 and 67, and level controls on your TNC/  
MCP.  
29,31  
58,69  
1
4 Reorient/ relocate your antenna or increase  
your antenna gain.  
5 Set the TNC/ MCP TX delay time to more  
than 300 ms.  
—
Attempts at controlling 1 Problem with cable that  
1 Check the cable and cable connections.  
67  
57  
the transceiver with  
the computer have  
failed.  
connects the PC to the  
TS-590S.  
2 Communication parameters  
set in your terminal  
2 Use the same parameters in the terminal and  
the transceiver. Check Menu Nos. 61 and  
62.  
program do not match the  
transceiver parameters.  
“TEMP-HI” appears  
and “CHECK” in  
Morse code sounds.  
A sensor in the transceiver  
detected high temperature.  
Stop transmitting and let the transceiver  
cool down for a while. Contact a Kenwood  
authorized service center to clean the internal air  
filters.  
—
Transmission  
suddenly stops.  
The voltage of the DC power  
supply is too high.  
Adjust the DC power supply voltage to  
13.8 V DC.  
1
“DSP ERR x” appears An internal DSP error occurs.  
(where x is a number  
from 0 ~ 3).  
—
Restart the transceiver by turning the power  
OFF and then back ON. If the problem persists,  
consult Kenwood authorized Service Center.  
“VGS ERR” appears. An internal error occurred in  
the VGS-1.  
Confirm that the connector of the VGS-1 is  
securely connected to the transceiver, then  
turn the transceiver power OFF and ON. If the  
problem persists, contact a Kenwood authorized  
service center for repairs.  
71  
77  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ꢁꢊꢀꢀ7528%/(6+227,1*  
Problem  
Probable Cause  
Corrective Action  
Page  
A message cannot be There is a communication  
recorded/ played back error between the transceiver  
or no announcement and the VGS-1.  
can be heard.  
Confirm that the connector of the VGS-1 is  
securely connected to the transceiver. Perform  
the Full reset. If the problem persists, contact a  
Kenwood authorized service center for repairs  
(with the VGS-1 attached).  
71,78  
The transceiver  
output power seems  
to be low in SSB  
mode.  
Most of the external RF  
Apply a continuous single tone (1 kHz) to the  
microphone audio input to measure the RF  
output power. The PEP will be the same as this  
RF output level.  
—
power meters measure the  
average RF power. So, the  
meter reading is low when  
you operate and talk in SSB  
mode. The LCD meter used  
in the TS-590S has relatively  
fast response time but it is not  
fast enough to measure the  
accurate PEP (Peak Envelope  
Power).  
The PC and external The input terminal is different  
Confirm that the setting of Menu No. 63 matches  
the input terminal for the external equipment.  
58  
equipment is not  
modulating.  
from the one specified (Menu  
No. 63) for the external  
equipment.  
4 Press [A/B (A=B)] to perform the VFO reset.  
0,&52352&(6625ꢀ5(6(7  
•
A confirmation message appears when  
If your transceiver seems to be malfunctioning,  
resetting the microprocessor to its default settings  
may resolve the problem. There are 2 levels  
of resetting the microprocessor of the TS-590S  
transceiver: Partial Reset and Full Reset.  
performing the VFO Reset. Press [A/B (A=B)]  
again to proceed. Otherwise, press any other  
key to cancel the VFO Reset and return to  
normal operation.  
•
The VFOs reset to the factory default values.  
,1,7,$/ꢀ6(77,1*6  
For each VFO, the factory defaults for the operating  
frequency and mode are as follows:  
)8//ꢀ5(6(7  
Perform a Full Reset if you want to erase all the data  
in all the memory channels. In addition, this function  
resets all the settings that you customized, to the  
factory defaults (i.e.- menu settings, antenna tuner  
preset data, etc.).  
•
•
VFO A: 14.000.00 MHz/ USB  
VFO B: 14.000.00 MHz/ USB  
The Memory channels and Quick Memory channels  
have no data stored.  
1 Turn the transceiver power OFF.  
2 Press [A/B (A=B)] + [ ] to switch the transceiver  
9)2ꢀ5(6(7  
ON.  
Perform a VFO Reset if a key or control does not  
function according to the instructions in this manual.  
The following data is NOT erased by performing a  
VFO Reset.  
•
A confirmation message appears on the display.  
3 Turn the MULTI/CH control and select “FULL  
RESET”.  
•
•
•
•
•
Memory channel data  
Menu settings  
4 Press [A/B (A=B)] to perform the Full reset.  
•
A confirmation message appears when  
performing the Full Reset. Press [A/B (A=B)]  
again to proceed. Otherwise, press any other  
key to cancel the Partial Reset and return to  
normal operation.  
Antenna tuner preset data  
ANT 1/ ANT 2 selection data  
Frequency and mode data for the Auto Mode  
function  
•
All frequencies, modes, memory data,  
adjustment values, and AT preset data are set  
to the factory default values.  
•
Various adjustment setting values  
1 Turn the transceiver power OFF.  
2 Press [A/B (A=B)] + [ ] to switch the transceiver  
ON.  
•
A confirmation message appears on the display.  
3 Turn the MULTI/CH control and select “VFO  
RESET”.  
78  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ꢁꢊꢀꢀ7528%/(6+227,1*  
ꢋꢎPꢀ%$1'ꢀ23(5$7,21ꢀꢂ.ꢈ7<3(ꢆꢀ86$ꢀ21/<ꢃ  
23(5$7,21ꢀ127,&(6  
Effective from July 3, 2003, FCC Report and Order  
(R&O) in ET Docket 02-98 granted US amateurs  
secondary access to five discrete channels in the  
vicinity of 5 MHz. General, Advanced, and Amateur  
Extra licensees may use the following five channels  
on a secondary basis with a maximum effective  
radiated power of 50 W PEP relative to a half wave  
dipole. Only upper sideband suppressed carrier voice  
transmissions may be used. The frequencies are  
5330.5, 5346.5, 5366.5, 5371.5 and 5403.5 kHz. The  
occupied bandwidth is limited to 2.8 kHz centered on  
5332, 5348, 5368, 5373, and 5405 kHz respectively.  
The TS-590S transceiver stops at the 60 m band as  
you scroll up or down the amateur radio frequency  
bands. For more information, contact ARRL or search  
their Web site using the key word “60 meter”:  
The transceiver has been designed and engineered to  
avoid possible hardware glitches. However, you may  
notice the following symptoms when you operate the  
transceiver. These symptoms are not malfunctions.  
'&ꢀ32:(5ꢀ6833/<  
As stated in the SPECIFICATIONS {page 80}, this  
transceiver requires a supplied DC voltage source of  
13.8 V 15%. If you find that the transceiver cannot  
be switched ON, or that it shuts OFF automatically,  
the DC voltage may be outside the specified range.  
In such a case, remove the DC cable from the  
transceiver immediately and confirm that the supplied  
voltage is within the specified range.  
http://www.arrl.org  
,17(51$/ꢀ&22/,1*ꢀ)$1  
The transceiver detects the temperature of the final  
department regardless of the transmission and  
reception state of the main body, in order to protect  
the internal circuits from high temperatures. The  
cooling fan speed and transmission output is controled  
through the following.  
•
When the thermistor detects a rise in temperature  
in the final department, the cooling fan turns on at  
low speed. As the temperature rises, the speed of  
the cooling fan increases.  
•
When an abnormally high temperature is detected,  
the temperature protection circuit activates,  
reducing the transmission output to the lowest  
possible power.  
When the temperature protection circuit activates,  
return the transceiver to receive mode and leave the  
transceiver power ON. Allow time for the cooling fan  
to return the internal temperature to normal.  
•
If you turn the transceiver power OFF, the cooling  
fan will not run and it will take much longer for the  
internal temperature to decrease.  
,17(51$/ꢀ%($76  
On some spots of the receiver frequencies, the  
S-meter moves or you cannot receive any signals.  
This is inevitable when you use superheterodyne  
receivers. You may notice the signals on the following  
spots of the frequency:  
•
•
•
15.600.00 MHz  
31.200.00 MHz  
46.800.00 MHz  
$*&  
When you turn the AGC function OFF {page 29}, the  
receiving audio signals can be distorted. In this case,  
decrease the RF gain, turn the pre-amplifier OFF, or  
turn the attenuator ON. In general, the RF gain must  
be greatly reduced when the AGC is turned OFF.  
79  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
237,21$/ꢀ$&&(6625,(6  
HS-5  
HS-6  
LF-30A  
MC-43S  
Delux Headphones  
Small Headphones  
Low-pass Filter  
Microphone  
(Uper cat-off frequency  
30 MHz)  
MC-47  
MC-60A  
MC-90  
PG-20  
Multi-function Microphone  
Desk-top Microphone  
DSP-compatible Desk-top  
Microphone  
DC cable (7 m/ 23 ft)  
Microphone sensitivity is low in FM mode.  
PS-60  
SO-3  
VGS-1  
SP-23  
Regulated DC Power  
Supply (22.5 A)  
TCXO unit  
Voice Guide and  
Storage unit  
External Speaker  
SP-50B  
MB-430  
ARCP-590/ ARHP-590  
Mobile Speaker  
Mobile Bracket  
Remote control software  
Download the free ARCP-590/ARHP-590 software  
from the following URL:  
http://www.kenwood.com/i/products/info/amateur/software  
_download.htm  
l
80  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
63(&,),&$7,216  
General  
Mode  
J3E (LSB, USB)/ A1A (CW)/ A3E (AM)/ F3E (FM)/ F1B (FSK)  
Number of memory channels  
110 + 10 (Quick memory channels)  
ꢂꢃꢀŸꢀꢌZLWKꢀEXLOWꢅLQꢀDQWHQQDꢀWXQHUꢀꢏꢉꢁꢊꢀaꢀꢏꢂꢃꢀŸꢍ  
'&ꢀꢏꢇꢁꢋꢀ9“ꢏꢂꢑ  
Antenna impedance  
Supply Voltage  
160 m ~ 6 m band  
Grounding method  
Negative ground  
7UDQVPLWꢀꢌPD[ꢁꢍ  
Less than ꢈꢃꢁꢂꢀ$ꢀ  
Current  
Receive (no signal)  
Less than ꢏꢁꢂꢀ$  
Usable temperature range  
–10°C ~ +50°C (+14°F ~ +122°F)  
)UHTXHQF\ꢀVWDELOLW\ꢀZLWKRXWꢀ  
62ꢅꢇ  
Frequency stability  
ZLWKꢀ62ꢅꢇ  
–10°C ~ 50°C  
–10°C ~ 50°C  
:LWKLQꢀ“ꢂꢀSSP  
:LWKLQꢀ“ꢃꢁꢂꢀSSP  
Dimensions (W x H x D Projections not included)  
Weight  
ꢈꢊꢃꢀ[ꢀꢒꢉꢀ[ꢀꢈꢒꢏꢀPPꢓꢀꢏꢃꢁꢉꢇꢀ[ꢀꢇꢁꢊꢋꢀ[ꢀꢏꢏꢁꢆꢉꢀLQFKHV  
$SSUR[ꢁꢀꢊꢁꢆꢀNJꢓꢀꢏꢉꢁꢇꢀOEV  
Transmitter  
160 m band  
80 m band  
ꢏꢁꢋꢀaꢀꢈꢁꢃꢀ0+]ꢀꢌ.ꢀW\SHꢍꢓꢀꢏꢁꢋꢏꢀaꢀꢈꢁꢃꢀ0+]ꢀꢌ(ꢀW\SHꢍ  
ꢇꢁꢂꢀaꢀꢆꢁꢃꢀ0+]ꢀꢌ.ꢀW\SHꢍꢓꢀꢇꢁꢂꢀaꢀꢇꢁꢋꢀ0+]ꢀꢌ(ꢀW\SHꢍ  
ꢂꢁꢏꢉꢊꢂꢀ0+]ꢀꢌ.ꢀW\SHꢍ  
ꢂꢁꢈꢂꢀaꢀꢂꢁꢆꢂꢀ0+]ꢀꢌ.ꢀW\SHꢍ  
60 m band  
40 m band  
30 m band  
ꢊꢁꢃꢀaꢀꢊꢁꢇꢀ0+]ꢀꢌ.ꢀW\SHꢍꢓꢀꢊꢁꢃꢀaꢀꢊꢁꢈꢀ0+]ꢀꢌ(ꢀW\SHꢍ  
ꢏꢃꢁꢏꢀaꢀꢏꢃꢁꢏꢂꢀ0+]  
ꢏꢆꢁꢃꢀaꢀꢏꢆꢁꢇꢂꢀ0+]  
ꢏꢋꢁꢃꢉꢋꢀaꢀꢏꢋꢁꢏꢉꢋꢀ0+]  
ꢈꢏꢁꢃꢀaꢀꢈꢏꢁꢆꢂꢀ0+]  
ꢈꢆꢁꢋꢒꢀaꢀꢈꢆꢁꢒꢒꢀ0+]  
ꢈꢋꢁꢃꢀaꢀꢈꢒꢁꢊꢀ0+]  
ꢂꢃꢁꢃꢀaꢀꢂꢆꢁꢃꢀ0+]ꢀꢌ.ꢅW\SHꢍꢀꢓꢀꢂꢃꢁꢃꢀaꢀꢂꢈꢁꢃꢀ0+]ꢀꢌ(ꢀW\SHꢍ  
100 W  
Frequency range  
20 m band  
ꢏꢊꢀPꢀEDQG  
15 m band  
12 m band  
10 m band  
6 m band  
0D[ꢁ  
SSB/ CW/ FSK/  
FM  
0LQꢁ  
0D[ꢁ  
0LQꢁ  
5 W  
2XWSXWꢀSRZHU  
25 W  
AM  
5 W  
Wide  
1DUURZ  
SSB  
AM  
/HVVꢀWKDQꢀ“ꢂꢀN+]  
/HVVꢀWKDQꢀ“ꢈꢁꢂꢀN+]  
Balanced  
Maximum frequency  
deviation (FM)  
Modulation  
/RZꢀSRZHU  
FM  
Reactance  
160 m ~ 10 m band  
6 m band  
Less than –50 dB  
Less than –60 dB  
More than 50 dB  
Spurious emissions  
Carrier suppression (SSB)  
8QZDQWHGꢀVLGHEDQGꢀVXSSUHVVLRQ  
ꢌPRGXODWLRQꢀIUHTXHQF\ꢀꢏꢁꢃꢀN+]ꢍ  
More than 50 dB  
Transmit frequency response  
–ꢉꢀG%ꢐꢀꢆꢃꢃꢀꢅꢀꢈꢉꢃꢃꢀ+]  
81  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ꢁꢌꢀ63(&,),&$7,216  
Transmitter  
“ꢒꢁꢒꢒꢒꢀN+]  
ꢉꢃꢃꢀŸ  
XIT shift frequency range  
Microphone impedance  
Receiver  
5;ꢏꢀꢌꢏꢁꢋꢓꢀꢇꢁꢂꢓꢀꢂꢓꢀꢊꢓꢀꢏꢆꢓꢀꢈꢏꢀ0+]ꢀ  
EDQGꢓꢀ,)ꢀEDQGꢀZLGWKꢀRIꢀꢈꢁꢊꢀN+]ꢀ RX2 (Other)  
or less (SSB/CW/FSK))  
Circuit type  
Double conversion  
superheterodyne  
Triple conversion  
superheterodyne  
Frequency range  
ꢃꢁꢏꢇꢀꢌ9)2ꢀꢇꢃꢀ.+]ꢍꢀaꢀꢂꢒꢁꢒꢒꢒꢁꢒꢒꢒꢀ0+]  
1st IF  
ꢏꢏꢁꢇꢊꢆꢀ0+]  
ꢀꢈꢆꢀN+]  
ï
ꢊꢇꢁꢃꢒꢂꢀ0+]  
Intermediate frequency 2nd IF  
3rd IF  
ꢏꢃꢁꢉꢒꢂꢀ0+]  
ꢈꢆꢀN+]ꢀꢌH[FHSWꢀ)0ꢍꢓꢀꢆꢂꢂꢀN+]ꢀꢌ)0ꢍ  
ꢃꢁꢏꢇꢀaꢀꢃꢁꢂꢈꢈꢀ0+]ꢐꢀꢀ/HVVꢀWKDQꢀꢃꢁꢂꢀ—9  
ꢃꢁꢂꢈꢈꢀaꢀꢏꢁꢊꢃꢂꢀ0+]ꢐꢀꢀ/HVVꢀWKDQꢀꢆꢀ—9  
ꢏꢁꢊꢃꢂꢀaꢀꢈꢆꢁꢂꢀ0+]ꢐꢀꢀ/HVVꢀWKDQꢀꢃꢁꢈꢀ—9  
ꢈꢆꢁꢂꢀaꢀꢇꢃꢁꢃꢀ0+]ꢐꢀꢀ/HVVꢀWKDQꢀꢃꢁꢏꢇꢀ—9  
ꢂꢃꢁꢃꢀaꢀꢂꢆꢁꢃꢀ0+]ꢐꢀꢀ/HVVꢀWKDQꢀꢃꢁꢏꢇꢀ—9  
SSB/ CW/ FSK  
(S/N 10 dB)  
ꢃꢁꢏꢇꢀaꢀꢃꢁꢂꢈꢈꢀ0+]ꢐꢀꢀ/HVVꢀWKDQꢀꢉꢁꢇꢀ—9  
ꢃꢁꢂꢈꢈꢀaꢀꢏꢁꢊꢃꢂꢀ0+]ꢐꢀꢀ/HVVꢀWKDQꢀꢇꢏꢁꢉꢀ—9  
ꢏꢁꢊꢃꢂꢀaꢀꢈꢆꢁꢂꢀ0+]ꢐꢀꢀ/HVVꢀWKDQꢀꢈꢀ—9  
ꢈꢆꢁꢂꢀaꢀꢇꢃꢁꢃꢀ0+]ꢐꢀꢀ/HVVꢀWKDQꢀꢏꢁꢇꢀ—9  
ꢂꢃꢁꢃꢀaꢀꢂꢆꢁꢃꢀ0+]ꢐꢀꢀ/HVVꢀWKDQꢀꢏꢁꢇꢀ—9  
Sensitivity  
AM (S/N 10 dB)  
ꢈꢋꢁꢃꢀaꢀꢇꢃꢁꢃꢀ0+]ꢐꢀꢀ/HVVꢀWKDQꢀꢃꢁꢈꢈꢀ—9  
ꢂꢃꢁꢃꢀaꢀꢂꢆꢁꢃꢀ0+]ꢐꢀꢀ/HVVꢀWKDQꢀꢃꢁꢈꢈꢀ—9  
ꢃꢁꢏꢇꢀaꢀꢃꢁꢂꢈꢈꢀ0+]ꢐꢀꢀ/HVVꢀWKDQꢀꢂꢁꢉꢀ—9  
ꢃꢁꢂꢈꢈꢀaꢀꢏꢁꢊꢃꢂꢀ0+]ꢐ Less than ꢏꢋꢁꢃꢀ—9  
ꢏꢁꢊꢃꢂꢀaꢀꢇꢃꢁꢃꢀ0+]ꢐ Less than ꢏꢁꢋꢀ—9  
ꢂꢃꢁꢃꢀaꢀꢂꢆꢁꢃꢀ0+]ꢐ Less than ꢏꢁꢏꢀ—9  
FM (12 dB SINAD)  
SSB/ CW/ FSK/ AM  
FM  
Squelch sensitivity  
Selectivity  
ꢈꢋꢁꢃꢀaꢀꢇꢃꢁꢃꢀ0+]ꢐ Less than ꢃꢁꢈꢀ—9  
ꢂꢃꢁꢃꢀaꢀꢂꢆꢁꢃꢀ0+]ꢐ Less than ꢃꢁꢈꢀ—9  
SSB  
0RUHꢀWKDQꢀꢈꢁꢈꢀN+]ꢀꢌ²ꢉꢀG%ꢍꢄꢀ/HVVꢀWKDQꢀꢆꢁꢆꢀN+]ꢀꢌ²ꢉꢃꢀG%ꢍ  
0RUHꢀWKDQꢀꢂꢃꢃꢀ+]ꢀꢌ²ꢉꢀG%ꢍꢄꢀ/HVVꢀWKDQꢀꢏꢁꢈꢀN+]ꢀꢌ²ꢉꢃꢀG%ꢍ  
0RUHꢀWKDQꢀꢉꢁꢃꢀN+]ꢀꢌ²ꢉꢀG%ꢍꢄꢀ/HVVꢀWKDQꢀꢏꢈꢁꢃꢀN+]ꢀꢌ²ꢂꢃꢀG%ꢍ  
CW/ FSK  
AM  
FM  
0RUHꢀWKDQꢀꢏꢈꢁꢃꢀN+]ꢀꢌ²ꢉꢀG%ꢍꢄꢀ/HVVꢀWKDQꢀꢈꢂꢁꢃꢀN+]ꢀꢌ²ꢂꢃꢀG%ꢍ  
Image Ratio  
IF Rejection  
Auto  
0RUHꢀWKDQꢀꢊꢃꢀG%  
0RUHꢀWKDQꢀꢊꢃꢀG%  
More than 60 dB  
0RUHꢀWKDQꢀꢊꢃꢀG%  
More than 40 dB  
More than ꢏꢁꢂꢀ:  
ꢋꢀŸ  
Spurious response  
Notch filter attenuation  
Manual  
%HDWꢀFDQFHOꢀDWWHQXDWLRQꢀꢌDWꢀꢏꢀN+]ꢍ  
$XGLRꢀRXWSXWꢀꢌꢋꢀŸꢄꢏꢃꢑꢀGLVWRUWLRQꢍ  
$XGLRꢀRXWSXWꢀLPSHGDQFHꢀꢌ(;7ꢁ63ꢍ  
RIT shift frequency range  
“ꢒꢁꢒꢒꢒꢀN+]  
6SHFLILFDWLRQVꢀDUHꢀVXEMHFWꢀWRꢀFKDQJHꢀZLWKRXWꢀQRWLFHꢀGXHꢀWRꢀDGYDQFHPHQWVꢀLQꢀWHFKQRORJ\ꢁ  
82  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Bu ürün 26891sayılı Resmi Gazete’de yayımlanan Elektrikli ve Elektronik Eşyalarda  
Bazı Zararlı Maddelerin Kullanımının Sınırlandırılmasına Dair Yönetmeliğe uygun  
olarak üretilmiştir.  
This product complies with Directive, Number 26891 regarding "REGULATION  
ON THE RESTRICTION OF THE USE OF CERTAIN HAZARDOUS SUBSTANCES IN  
ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT".  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Indesit Washer Dryer WD 125 TS User Manual
Indesit Washer Dryer WIDXL 106 User Manual
Indesit Washer Dryer WIL143UK User Manual
Janome Sewing Machine 4900 QC User Manual
Jenn Air Cooktop W10298938A User Manual
John Lewis Cooktop JLBIIH603 User Manual
Kenmore Dishwasher 66516712 User Manual
Kenwood Wheelchair 241E User Manual
Kettler Smoke Alarm 07820 400 User Manual
King Canada Grinder KC 10SG User Manual